Product Detail Manual EC
User Manual: ec
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 648
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM B ENGINE SECTION EC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM A EC C D E CONTENTS INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 8 Alphabetical Index .................................................... 8 DTC No. Index ....................................................... 12 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 16 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................ 16 Precautions for Battery Service .............................. 16 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T .......................................................................... 16 Precaution .............................................................. 17 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 19 PREPARATION ......................................................... 20 Special Service Tools ............................................. 20 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 21 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 22 System Diagram ..................................................... 22 Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................... 23 System Chart ......................................................... 24 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 25 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 27 Air Conditioning Cut Control ................................... 28 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) .................................................................... 28 CAN communication .............................................. 29 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .............................. 34 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 34 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment ............................................................. 35 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 46 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................ 46 Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 46 Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 48 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 50 Introduction ............................................................ 50 Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 50 Emission-Related Diagnostic Information .............. 51 IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)... 66 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 66 OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 70 Revision; 2004 April TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 75 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 75 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 78 Fail-Safe Chart ....................................................... 80 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 81 Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 86 Engine Control Component Parts Location ............ 90 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 96 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............. 98 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ..................... 98 CONSULT-II Function ........................................... 107 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 119 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 122 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 125 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 128 Description ............................................................ 128 Testing Condition .................................................. 128 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 128 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 129 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ....................................................................... 132 Description ............................................................ 132 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 132 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM ................... 133 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 133 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 136 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 140 Description ............................................................ 140 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 140 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 140 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 141 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 142 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ........................ 143 Description ............................................................ 143 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 143 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 144 EC-1 2003 G35 Coupe F G H I J K L M DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 144 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 145 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER. 146 Description ............................................................ 146 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 146 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 146 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 147 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 148 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 151 Component Inspection .......................................... 153 Removal and Installation ...................................... 153 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER. 154 Description ............................................................ 154 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 154 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 154 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 155 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 156 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 159 Component Inspection .......................................... 161 Removal and Installation ...................................... 161 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 162 Component Description ........................................ 162 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 162 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 162 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 163 Overall Function Check ........................................ 164 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 165 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 166 Component Inspection .......................................... 169 Removal and Installation ...................................... 169 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 170 Component Description ........................................ 170 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 170 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 170 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 171 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 172 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 173 Component Inspection .......................................... 176 Removal and Installation ...................................... 176 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 177 Component Description ........................................ 177 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 177 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 177 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 179 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 180 Component Inspection .......................................... 181 Removal and Installation ...................................... 181 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 182 Component Description ........................................ 182 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 182 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 183 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 184 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 185 Component Inspection .......................................... 186 Removal and Installation ...................................... 186 Revision; 2004 April DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 187 Component Description ........................................ 187 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .187 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 187 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 188 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 189 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 190 Component Inspection .......................................... 193 Removal and Installation ....................................... 193 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 194 Component Description ........................................ 194 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 194 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 195 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 195 Component Inspection .......................................... 196 Removal and Installation ....................................... 196 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 197 Component Description ........................................ 197 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 197 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 197 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 198 Component Inspection .......................................... 198 Removal and Installation ....................................... 199 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................. 200 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 200 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 200 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 200 Component Inspection .......................................... 201 Removal and Installation ....................................... 201 DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 ..................................... 202 Component Description ........................................ 202 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .202 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 202 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 203 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 204 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 207 Component Inspection .......................................... 210 Removal and Installation ....................................... 211 DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 ..................................... 212 Component Description ........................................ 212 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .212 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 212 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 213 Overall Function Check ......................................... 214 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 215 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 218 Component Inspection .......................................... 223 Removal and Installation ....................................... 224 DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 ..................................... 225 Component Description ........................................ 225 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .225 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 225 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 226 Overall Function Check ......................................... 227 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 228 EC-2 2003 G35 Coupe Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 231 Component Inspection ......................................... 232 Removal and Installation ...................................... 234 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 .................................... 235 Component Description ........................................ 235 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 235 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 235 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 236 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 237 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 240 Component Inspection ......................................... 243 Removal and Installation ...................................... 244 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 .................................... 245 Component Description ........................................ 245 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 245 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 245 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 246 Overall Function Check ........................................ 246 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 248 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 251 Component Inspection ......................................... 254 Removal and Installation ...................................... 256 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION .............................................................. 257 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 257 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 257 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 259 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 261 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION .............................................................. 266 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 266 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 266 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 268 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 270 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 274 Component Description ........................................ 274 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 274 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 274 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 276 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 277 Component Inspection ......................................... 278 Removal and Installation ...................................... 278 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ......................... 279 Component Description ........................................ 279 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 279 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 279 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 280 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 281 Component Inspection ......................................... 282 Removal and Installation ...................................... 282 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 283 Component Description ........................................ 283 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 283 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 283 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 284 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 285 Revision; 2004 April Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 286 Component Inspection .......................................... 289 Removal and Installation ...................................... 289 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 290 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 290 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 290 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 291 DTC P0327, P0328 KS ........................................... 296 Component Description ........................................ 296 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 296 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 296 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 297 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 298 Component Inspection .......................................... 299 Removal and Installation ...................................... 300 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 301 Component Description ........................................ 301 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 301 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 301 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 301 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 302 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 303 Component Inspection .......................................... 306 Removal and Installation ...................................... 306 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ........ 307 Component Description ........................................ 307 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 307 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 307 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 307 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 308 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 311 Component Inspection .......................................... 314 Removal and Installation ...................................... 314 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION ........................................................................ 315 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 315 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 315 Overall Function Check ........................................ 316 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 317 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 320 System Description ............................................... 320 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 320 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 320 Overall Function Check ........................................ 321 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 322 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 325 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 325 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 326 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 328 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 335 Description ............................................................ 335 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 335 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 336 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 336 EC-3 2003 G35 Coupe A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 337 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 339 Component Inspection .......................................... 340 Removal and Installation ...................................... 341 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ..................................................................... 342 Component Description ........................................ 342 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 342 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 342 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 343 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 344 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 345 Component Inspection .......................................... 347 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................. 349 Component Description ........................................ 349 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 349 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 349 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 350 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 350 Component Inspection .......................................... 351 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................. 352 Component Description ........................................ 352 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 352 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 352 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 353 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 354 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 355 Component Inspection .......................................... 357 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................. 358 Component Description ........................................ 358 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 358 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 358 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 359 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 360 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 361 Component Inspection .......................................... 365 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 366 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 366 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 367 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 368 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 374 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 374 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 375 Overall Function Check ........................................ 376 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 377 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 384 Component Description ........................................ 384 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 384 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 384 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 385 Removal and Installation ...................................... 385 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 386 Revision; 2004 April Component Description ........................................ 386 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 386 Overall Function Check ......................................... 386 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 387 Removal and Installation ....................................... 387 DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 388 Component Description ........................................ 388 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 388 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 388 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 389 Removal and Installation ....................................... 389 DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 390 Description ............................................................ 390 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 390 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 390 Overall Function Check ......................................... 391 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 391 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 392 Description ............................................................ 392 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 392 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 392 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 393 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 394 Description ............................................................ 394 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 394 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 394 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 395 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 396 Component Description ........................................ 396 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .396 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 396 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 396 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 397 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 398 Component Inspection .......................................... 400 DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 401 Component Description ........................................ 401 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 401 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 401 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 402 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................ 404 Component Description ........................................ 404 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 404 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 404 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 405 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 406 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................................................................... 408 Component Description ........................................ 408 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .408 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 408 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 408 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 409 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 412 Component Inspection .......................................... 414 Removal and Installation ....................................... 414 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL EC-4 2003 G35 Coupe ACTUATOR ............................................................ 415 Component Description ........................................ 415 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 415 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 415 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 416 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION .............................................................. 417 Description ........................................................... 417 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 417 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 417 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 418 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 419 Component Inspection ......................................... 422 Remove and Installation ....................................... 422 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY .................................................................... 423 Component Description ........................................ 423 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 423 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 423 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 423 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 425 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 426 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........ 428 Component Description ........................................ 428 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 428 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 428 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 429 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 430 Component Inspection ......................................... 431 Removal and Installation ...................................... 432 DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 ..................................... 433 Component Description ........................................ 433 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 433 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 433 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 434 Overall Function Check ........................................ 435 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 435 Component Inspection ......................................... 437 Removal and Installation ...................................... 438 DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 ..................................... 439 Component Description ........................................ 439 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 439 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 439 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 440 Overall Function Check ........................................ 441 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 441 Component Inspection ......................................... 443 Removal and Installation ...................................... 445 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 ..................................... 446 Component Description ........................................ 446 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 446 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 446 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 447 Overall Function Check ........................................ 447 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 449 Revision; 2004 April Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 452 Component Inspection .......................................... 455 Removal and Installation ...................................... 457 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 ..................................... 458 Component Description ........................................ 458 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 458 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 458 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 459 Overall Function Check ........................................ 459 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 461 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 464 Component Inspection .......................................... 467 Removal and Installation ...................................... 469 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL .... 470 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 470 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 470 Overall Function Check ........................................ 471 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 471 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .......................... 472 Description ............................................................ 472 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 472 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 472 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 472 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 473 Description ............................................................ 473 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 473 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 473 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 473 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ........ 474 Description ............................................................ 474 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 475 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 475 Overall Function Check ........................................ 476 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 478 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 480 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 484 Component Inspection .......................................... 485 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 486 Component Description ........................................ 486 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 486 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 486 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 487 Removal and Installation ...................................... 487 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 488 Component Description ........................................ 488 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 488 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 488 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 489 Removal and Installation ...................................... 489 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 490 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 490 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 490 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 491 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 492 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 495 Description ............................................................ 495 EC-5 2003 G35 Coupe A EC C D E F G H I J K L M CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 495 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 496 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 496 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 497 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 499 Component Inspection .......................................... 501 Removal and Installation ...................................... 502 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ..................................................................... 503 Component Description ........................................ 503 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 503 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 503 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 504 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 505 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 506 Component Inspection .......................................... 508 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 510 Component Description ........................................ 510 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 510 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 510 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 511 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 512 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 514 Component Inspection .......................................... 516 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 517 Component Description ........................................ 517 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 517 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 517 DTC confirmation Procedure ................................ 518 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 519 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 521 Component Inspection .......................................... 531 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 533 Component Description ........................................ 533 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 533 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 533 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 534 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ...................................... 535 Component Description ........................................ 535 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 535 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 535 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 535 Overall Function Check ........................................ 536 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 537 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 540 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 544 Description ............................................................ 544 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 544 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 544 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 544 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 545 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 546 Component Inspection .......................................... 549 Revision; 2004 April DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 550 Component Description ........................................ 550 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .550 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 550 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 551 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 552 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 553 Component Inspection .......................................... 555 Removal and Installation ....................................... 556 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 557 Component Description ........................................ 557 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .557 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 557 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 558 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 559 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 560 Component Inspection .......................................... 563 Removal and Installation ....................................... 563 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 564 Component Description ........................................ 564 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .564 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 564 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 565 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 566 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 567 Component Inspection .......................................... 570 Removal and Installation ....................................... 570 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 571 Component Description ........................................ 571 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .571 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 571 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 572 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 573 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 574 Component Inspection .......................................... 579 Removal and Installation ....................................... 579 IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 580 Component Description ........................................ 580 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 581 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 586 Component Inspection .......................................... 591 Removal and Installation ....................................... 591 INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 592 Component Description ........................................ 592 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .592 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 593 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 595 Component Inspection .......................................... 597 Removal and Installation ....................................... 597 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................. 598 Description ............................................................ 598 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .598 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 599 EC-6 2003 G35 Coupe Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 600 Component Inspection ......................................... 603 Removal and Installation ...................................... 603 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 604 Component Description ........................................ 604 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 605 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 606 Removal and Installation ...................................... 608 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 609 Description ........................................................... 609 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 609 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 609 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ......................................... 610 Component Description ........................................ 610 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 610 Wiring Diagram .....................................................611 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 613 Component Inspection ......................................... 623 ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 625 Component Description ........................................ 625 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 625 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 626 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 627 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ..................... 628 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 628 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 630 Description ............................................................ 630 Component Inspection .......................................... 633 Removal and Installation ...................................... 634 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ...................... 634 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) .................................................................... 637 System Description ............................................... 637 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 638 Component Inspection .......................................... 640 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 642 Description ............................................................ 642 Component Inspection .......................................... 642 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 644 System Description ............................................... 644 Component Description ........................................ 645 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 646 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 646 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 646 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 646 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 646 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 646 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 646 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ......................... 646 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater ......................... 646 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 646 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 646 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 647 Injector .................................................................. 647 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 647 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-7 2003 G35 Coupe INDEX FOR DTC INDEX FOR DTC Alphabetical Index PFP:00024 ABS0036X NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-140, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ×:Applicable —: Not applicable 1 DTC* Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II 2 GST* Trip MIL lighting up Reference page ECM*3 A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 1 × AT-159 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 2 × AT-122 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 × EC-550 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 × EC-550 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 × EC-557 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 × EC-557 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 × EC-571 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 1 — EC-517 ASCD SW P1564 1564 1 — EC-510 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 1 — EC-533 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 2 × AT-146 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 2 — EC-544 5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000* 1 × EC-140 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 2 — EC-140 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-301 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 1 × EC-470 CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 1 × EC-470 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 × EC-307 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 2 × EC-307 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 2 — EC-486 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 2 — EC-488 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 2 × EC-290 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 2 × EC-290 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 2 × EC-290 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 2 × EC-290 CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 2 × EC-290 CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 2 × EC-290 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 1 × AT-189 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 1 × AT-194 ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-401 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P1065 1065 2 × EC-404 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 1 × EC-182 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 1 × EC-182 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 1 × EC-194 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-474 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 2 × AT-115 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 × EC-415 Revision; 2004 April EC-8 2003 G35 Coupe INDEX FOR DTC DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II Trip MIL lighting up Reference page 3 GST*2 ECM* ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-417 ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-428 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-423 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-423 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 2 × EC-366 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 2 × EC-320 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 2 × EC-325 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 2 × EC-349 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 2 × EC-352 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 2 × EC-358 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 2 × EC-374 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 1 × AT-179 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 1 × AT-184 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 2 × EC-279 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 2 × EC-279 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 2 × EC-274 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 2 × EC-384 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 2 × EC-386 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 2 × EC-388 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 2 × EC-257 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 2 × EC-257 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 2 × EC-266 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 2 × EC-266 HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 1 × AT-203 HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 1 × AT-198 HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 2 × EC-202 HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 2 × EC-212 HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 2 × EC-225 HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 2 × EC-433 HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 2 × EC-439 HO2S1 (B2) P0152 0152 2 × EC-202 HO2S1 (B2) P0153 0153 2 × EC-212 HO2S1 (B2) P0154 0154 2 × EC-225 HO2S1 (B2) P1163 1163 2 × EC-433 HO2S1 (B2) P1164 1164 2 × EC-439 HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 2 × EC-146 HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 2 × EC-146 HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 2 × EC-146 HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 2 × EC-146 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 × EC-235 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 2 × EC-245 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 2 × EC-446 Revision; 2004 April EC-9 2003 G35 Coupe A EC C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II Trip MIL lighting up Reference page 3 2 ECM* HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 2 × EC-458 HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 2 × EC-235 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 2 × EC-245 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 2 × EC-446 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 2 × EC-458 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 2 × EC-154 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 2 × EC-154 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 2 × EC-154 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 2 × EC-154 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 1 × AT-170 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 1 × AT-175 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 2 × EC-177 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 2 × EC-177 IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 2 × EC-197 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 2 × EC-143 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 2 × EC-143 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 × EC-408 GST* INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P1136 1136 2 × EC-408 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 2 × EC-392 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 2 × EC-394 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-296 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 2 — EC-296 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 2 × AT-127 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 1 × AT-213 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 1 × AT-208 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 1 × EC-162 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 1 × EC-170 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 1 × EC-170 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 2 × EC-290 P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — EC-66 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. No DTC Flashing*4 — Flashing*4 EC-67 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — — — P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 2 × EC-535 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 2 × AT-105 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 2 × EC-335 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 2 × EC-335 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 2 × EC-495 NATS MALFUNCTION PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 2 — EC-396 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-490 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 2 × AT-117 Revision; 2004 April EC-10 2003 G35 Coupe INDEX FOR DTC DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II Trip MIL lighting up Reference page 3 GST*2 ECM* TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 2 — EC-472 TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 2 — EC-473 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 2 × EC-200 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 × EC-283 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 × EC-283 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 1 × EC-187 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 1 × EC-187 TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 1 × AT-144 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 1 × EC-564 TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 1716 2 × AT-152 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 2 × EC-315 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 2 × EC-315 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6 P0720 0720 2 × AT-110 P0500 0500 2 × EC-390 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 2 × EC-342 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 2 × EC-503 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: When engine is running. *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-11 2003 G35 Coupe INDEX FOR DTC DTC No. Index ABS0036Y NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-140, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ×:Applicable —: Not applicable DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 ECM*3 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. — Flashing*4 EC-67 No DTC Flashing*4 U1000 1000*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 × EC-140 U1001 1001*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-140 P0000 0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. — — — P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 2 × EC-143 P0021 0021 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 2 × EC-143 P0031 0031 HO2S1 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-146 P0032 0032 HO2S1 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-146 P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-154 P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-154 P0051 0051 HO2S1 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-146 P0052 0052 HO2S1 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-146 P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-154 P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-154 P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-162 P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-170 P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-170 P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-177 P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-177 P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-182 P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-182 P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-187 P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-187 P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR 1 × EC-194 P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR 2 × EC-197 P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN 2 × EC-200 P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-202 P0133 0133 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-212 P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-225 P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-235 P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-245 P0152 0152 HO2S1 (B2) 2 × EC-202 P0153 0153 HO2S1 (B2) 2 × EC-212 P0154 0154 HO2S1 (B2) 2 × EC-225 P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-235 Revision; 2004 April EC-12 2003 G35 Coupe INDEX FOR DTC DTC*1 CONSULT-II Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 Trip MIL lighting up Reference page GST*2 ECM* P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-245 P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 2 × EC-257 P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 2 × EC-266 P0174 0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 2 × EC-257 P0175 0175 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 2 × EC-266 P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR 2 × EC-274 P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-279 P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-279 P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-283 P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-283 P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE 2 × EC-290 P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE 2 × EC-290 P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE 2 × EC-290 P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE 2 × EC-290 P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE 2 × EC-290 P0305 0305 CYL 5 MISFIRE 2 × EC-290 P0306 0306 CYL 6 MISFIRE 2 × EC-290 P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-296 P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-296 P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-301 P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 2 × EC-307 P0345 0345 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 2 × EC-307 P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 2 × EC-315 P0430 0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 2 × EC-315 P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON 2 × EC-320 P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK 2 × EC-325 P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-335 P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-335 P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 × EC-342 P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-349 P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-352 P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-358 P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK 2 × EC-366 P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK 2 × EC-374 P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH 2 × EC-384 P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 × EC-386 P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-388 P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 2 × EC-390 P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM 2 × EC-392 P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM 2 × EC-394 P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC 2 — EC-396 P0605 0605 ECM 1 or 2 × or — EC-401 Revision; 2004 April EC-13 2003 G35 Coupe A EC C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC DTC*1 CONSULT-II 3 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) 2 ECM* P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC GST* 6 Trip MIL lighting up Reference page 2 × AT-105 2 × AT-146 2 × AT-110 P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT* P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG 2 × AT-115 P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC 2 × AT-117 P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN 2 × AT-122 P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC 2 × AT-127 P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-404 P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 2 × EC-408 P1121 1121 ETC ACTR 1 × EC-415 P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC 1 × EC-417 P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-423 P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-423 P1128 1128 ETC MOT 1 × EC-428 P1136 1136 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 2 × EC-408 P1143 1143 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-433 P1144 1144 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-439 P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-446 P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-458 P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 1 × EC-470 P1163 1163 HO2S1 (B2) 2 × EC-433 P1164 1164 HO2S1 (B2) 2 × EC-439 P1166 1166 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-446 P1167 1167 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-458 P1168 1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 1 × EC-470 P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN 2 — EC-472 P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC 2 — EC-473 P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 × EC-474 P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-486 P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-488 P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC 1 × EC-490 P1444 1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-495 P1446 1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 × EC-503 P1564 1564 ASCD SW 1 — EC-510 P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW 1 — EC-517 P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN 1 — EC-533 P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION 2 — EC-66 P1705 1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T 1 × AT-144 P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-535 P1716 1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC 2 × AT-152 P1730 1730 A/T INTERLOCK 1 × AT-159 P1752 1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC 1 × AT-170 Revision; 2004 April EC-14 2003 G35 Coupe INDEX FOR DTC DTC*1 CONSULT-II 3 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page GST*2 ECM* P1754 1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN 1 × AT-175 P1757 1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC 1 × AT-179 P1759 1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT 1 × AT-184 P1762 1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC 1 × AT-189 P1764 1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN 1 × AT-194 P1767 1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC 1 × AT-198 P1769 1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN 1 × AT-203 P1772 1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC 1 × AT-208 P1774 1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT 1 × AT-213 P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 2 — EC-544 P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-550 P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-550 P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-557 P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-557 P2135 2135 TP SENSOR 1 × EC-564 P2138 2138 APP SENSOR 1 × EC-571 A EC C D E F G H *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: When engine is running. *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-15 2003 G35 Coupe PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ABS008G3 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Battery Service ABS00B3Q Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interference between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, the window slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automatic window function will not work with the battery disconnected. On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T ABS00371 The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-63, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" . ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. Revision; 2004 April EC-16 2003 G35 Coupe PRECAUTIONS Precaution ● ● ● ● ABS00372 A Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running. Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect battery ground cable. EC C D SEF289H ● ● Do not disassemble ECM. If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the ECM value. The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation. E F G PBIB1164E ● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown at right. H I J K SEC406D L ● ● ● ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. Securely connect ECM harness connectors. A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs. Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc. Keep engine control system parts and harness dry. Revision; 2004 April EC-17 M PBIB0090E 2003 G35 Coupe PRECAUTIONS ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-98 . Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor. Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator. Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious incidents. Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS). After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function Check should be a good result if the repair is completed. MEF040D SEF217U ● ● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow the two tester probes to contact. Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and damage the ECM power transistor. Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF348N Revision; 2004 April EC-18 2003 G35 Coupe PRECAUTIONS ● B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown in the figure. A EC C SEC893C D ● ● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque. E F G PBIB1100E ● ● ● H Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting. Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily. Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown. I J K SEF709Y ● – – – – When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location. Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units. Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the harness of electronic controls. Do not let them run parallel for a long distance. Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave radio can be kept smaller. Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis L M SEF708Y ABS00373 When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-15, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Revision; 2004 April EC-19 2003 G35 Coupe PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 ABS00374 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10117100 (J36471-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut S-NT379 KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors a: 22 mm (0.87 in) S-NT636 (J44321) Fuel pressure gauge kit Checking fuel pressure LEC642 KV109E0010 (J-46209) Break-out box Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester S-NT825 KV109E0080 (J-45819) Y-cable adapter Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester S-NT826 EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) S-NT564 Revision; 2004 April EC-20 2003 G35 Coupe PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools ABS00375 A Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) Description Leak detector i.e.: (J41416) EC Locating the EVAP leak C S-NT703 EVAP service port adapter i.e.: (J41413-OBD) D Applying positive pressure through EVAP service port E F S-NT704 Fuel filler cap adapter i.e.: (MLR-8382) Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure G H S-NT815 Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor I J S-NT705 Oxygen sensor thread cleaner i.e.: (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below. a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor AEM488 i.e.: (PermatexTM 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A907) S-NT779 Revision; 2004 April EC-21 L M Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads. Anti-seize lubricant K 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram PFP:23710 ABS00376 PBIB1101E Revision; 2004 April EC-22 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Vacuum Hose Drawing ABS00377 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1552E Refer to EC-22, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System. Revision; 2004 April EC-23 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM System Chart Input (Sensor) ABS00378 ECM Function Output (Actuator) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injectors ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic ignition system Power transistor ● Mass air flow sensor Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay*4 ● Engine coolant temperature sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1 ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator ● ● Throttle position sensor On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel)*4 ● Accelerator pedal position sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ● Intake air temperature sensor EVAP canister purge flow control ● Power steering pressure sensor EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Ignition switch Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay*4 ● Battery voltage Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays*4 ● Knock sensor ● Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Stop lamp switch ● ASCD steering switch ● ASCD brake switch ● ASCD clutch switch ● Fuel level sensor*1 *3 ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system EVAP canister vent control valve ● Fuel tank temperature sensor*1 ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 *2 ● TCM (Transmission control module) *3 ● Air conditioner switch*3 ● Wheel sensor*3 ● Electrical load signal*3 *1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis. *2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions. *3: This input signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *4: This output signal is sent from the ECM through CAN communication line. Revision; 2004 April EC-24 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ABS00379 A INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*3 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Knock sensor Engine knocking condition Battery Battery voltage*3 Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Heated oxygen sensor 2 *1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Air conditioner switch*2 Air conditioner operation Wheel sensor*2 Vehicle speed ECM function Actuator EC C D Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injectors E F G *1: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor. I J VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below.● During warm-up ● When starting the engine ● During acceleration ● Hot-engine operation ● When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models) ● High-load, high-speed operation ● During deceleration ● During high engine speed operation Revision; 2004 April EC-25 2003 G35 Coupe K L M ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL) PBIB0121E The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way catalyst 1 can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about heated oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-202 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture). This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst 1. Even if the switching characteristics of heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated oxygen sensor 2. Open Loop Control The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. ● Deceleration and acceleration ● High-load, high-speed operation ● Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit ● Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature ● High engine coolant temperature ● During warm-up ● After shifting from N to D (A/T models) ● When starting the engine MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios. “Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. “Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean. “Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment. Revision; 2004 April EC-26 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FUEL INJECTION TIMING A EC C SEF179U D Two types of systems are used. Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is running. Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. E F G FUEL SHUT-OFF Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds. Electronic Ignition (EI) System H ABS0037A INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Knock sensor Engine knocking Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Battery Battery voltage*2 Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed ECM function I Actuator J Ignition timing control K Power transistor L M *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best airfuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown. The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec A °BTDC During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM. ● At starting ● During warm-up Revision; 2004 April EC-27 SEF742M 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM At idle At low battery voltage ● During acceleration The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. ● ● Air Conditioning Cut Control ABS0037B INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner ON signal Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*2 Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Wheel sensor* 1 ECM function Air conditioner cut control Actuator Air conditioner relay Vehicle speed *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off. ● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. ● When cranking the engine. ● At high engine speeds. ● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. ● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. ● When engine speed is excessively low. ● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high. Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) ABS0037C INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Wheel sensor* Vehicle speed ECM function Fuel cut control Actuator Fuel injectors *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled. Revision; 2004 April EC-28 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM NOTE: This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-25 . CAN communication A ABS0037D SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. EC C D CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT Body type Coupe Axle 2WD Engine E VQ35DE Transmission M/T Brake control A/T F VDC CAN communication unit × ECM × × TCM Data link connector × × Combination meter × × BCM × × Steering angle sensor × × VDC/TCS/ABS control unit × × IPDM E/R × × EC-30 EC-32 CAN communication type G H I J ×: Applicable K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-29 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM M/T Models SYSTEM DIAGRAM SKIA4474E INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART T: Transmit R: Receive ECM Combination meter Engine speed signal T R Engine coolant temperature signal T R Accelerator pedal position signal T Fuel consumption monitor signal T Air conditioner switch signal R A/C compressor request signal T A/C compressor feedback signal T Blower fan motor switch signal R Cooling fan motor operation signal T Signals Position lights request signal High beam status signal R T R R T R R R R Front fog lights request signal T R T R R T T R R T T R Vehicle speed signal R Sleep request 1 signal R R T T Wake up request 1 signal R T Wake up request 2 signal R T Door switch signal (without navigation system) R T Door switch signal (with navigation system) T R Turn indicator signal R T Seat belt buckle switch signal T R Oil pressure switch signal R Buzzer output signal R T Trunk switch signal R T Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R EC-30 R T T Sleep request 2 signal Revision; 2004 April IPDM E/R R R High beam request signal VDC/TCS/ ABS control unit R Low beam request signal Low beam status signal BCM Steering angle sensor R R T 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Signals Fuel level sensor signal ECM Combination meter R T BCM Steering angle sensor VDC/TCS/ ABS control unit IPDM E/R A EC Front wiper request signal T R Front wiper stop position signal R T Rear window defogger switch signal T R R T Hood switch signal R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal T Rear window defogger control signal R Steering angle sensor signal C D R T R E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-31 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM A/T Models SYSTEM DIAGRAM SKIA1880E INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART T: Transmit R: Receive ECM TCM Combination meter Engine speed signal T R R Engine coolant temperature signal T R R Accelerator pedal position signal T R Closed throttle position signal T R Signals Wide open throttle position signal T R Battery voltage signal T R Stop lamp switch R Fuel consumption monitor signal T A/T self-diagnosis signal R BCM Steering angle sensor VDC/TCS/ ABS control unit R R T R T A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal T R A/T position indicator signal T R ABS operation signal R T A/T shift schedule change demand signal R T Air conditioner switch signal R A/C compressor request signal T A/C compressor feedback signal T Blower fan motor switch signal R Cooling fan motor operation signal T R R T R R Low beam request signal R High beam request signal High beam status signal R T Position lights request signal Low beam status signal R R Front fog lights request signal T R T R R T T R R T T R R Vehicle speed signal Sleep request 1 signal R R T T R R T Sleep request 2 signal T Wake up request 1 signal R T Wake up request 2 signal R T Revision; 2004 April IPDM E/R EC-32 R 2003 G35 Coupe ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Combination meter BCM Door switch signal (without navigation system) R T Door switch signal (with navigation system) T R Turn indicator signal R T Seat belt buckle switch signal T R Oil pressure switch signal R Buzzer output signal R T Trunk switch signal R T Signals ECM TCM Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Fuel level sensor signal R T Output shaft revolution signal R T Turbine revolution signal R T Steering angle sensor VDC/TCS/ ABS control unit IPDM E/R R EC C T D E F G Front wiper request signal T R Front wiper stop position signal R T Rear window defogger switch signal T R R T Rear window defogger control signal A R Manual mode signal R T Not manual mode signal R T Manual mode shift up signal R T Manual mode shift down signal R T Manual mode indicator signal T R I J Hood switch signal R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal T R Steering angle sensor signal H T K L R M Revision; 2004 April EC-33 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check PFP:00018 ABS0037E IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF058Y With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING Any of following two methods may be used. Method A 1. 2. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. Check ignition timing. PBIB1287E Method B 1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil. PBIB1019E 2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire. PBIB1097E Revision; 2004 April EC-34 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE A EC C SEF166Y 3. D Check ignition timing. E F G PBIB1655E Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment ABS0037F PREPARATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. H Make sure that the following parts are in good order. ● Battery ● Ignition system ● Engine oil and coolant levels ● Fuses ● ECM harness connector ● Vacuum hoses ● Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) ● Fuel pressure ● Engine compression ● Throttle valve ● Evaporative emission system On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in N position. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. Turn off headlamp, heater blower, rear window defogger. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Revision; 2004 April EC-35 2003 G35 Coupe I J K L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE PBIB1054E Revision; 2004 April EC-36 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE INSPECTION PROCEDURE A 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for EC scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections C Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks D Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E Head lamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. F Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature G indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. H I SEF976U Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. J 5. K L M SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-37 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under noload, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. SEF978U 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. A/T: M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) SEF058Y Without CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. 1. 2. A/T: M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-38 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. EC C 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN D With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. A/T: M/T: E 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. G 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) H A/T: M/T: OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-307 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-301 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. K L 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. M Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL124, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" . >> GO TO 4. Revision; 2004 April EC-39 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. A/T: M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) 15 ± 5° BTDC (in N position) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 11. PBIB1655E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 14. NO >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. A/T: M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. A/T: M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. Revision; 2004 April EC-40 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. A/T: M/T: EC 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) 15 ± 5° BTDC (in N position) C OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 16. D PBIB1655E E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-50, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. F G 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-307 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-301 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. I J 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. K Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL124, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" . L M >> GO TO 4. Revision; 2004 April EC-41 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 19. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds. 1 time: 2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG (Monitor does not fluctuate.)>>GO TO 23. NG (Monitor fluctuates less than 5 times.)>>GO TO 31. PBIB0120E 20. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) SIGNAL Without CONSULT-II 1. Stop engine and set ECM to Self-diagnostic mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . 2. Start engine and run it at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG (MIL does not come on)>>GO TO 23. NG (MIL comes on less than 5 times)>>GO TO 31. 21. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. 2. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds. 1 time: 2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (Monitor does not fluctuate.)>>GO TO 24. NG (Monitor fluctuates less than 5 times.)>>GO TO 31. Revision; 2004 April EC-42 PBIB0120E 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 22. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) SIGNAL A Without CONSULT-II Switch the monitored sensor from bank 1 to bank 2. Refer to EC-68, "How to Switch Monitored Sensor EC From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa" . 2. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds. C OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (MIL does not come on)>>GO TO 24. D NG (MIL comes on less than 5 times)>>GO TO 31. 1. 23. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-204, "BANK 1" . Continuity should exist. E F G 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 25. NG >> 1. Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1). 2. GO TO 4. H I 24. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-206, "BANK 2" . Continuity should exist. 25. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING Reconnect ECM harness connector. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 26. 26. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 27. Revision; 2004 April K L 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 25. NG >> 1. Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2). 2. GO TO 4. 1. 2. J EC-43 2003 G35 Coupe M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 27. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? YES or NO YES (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 28. YES (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 29. NO >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 28. CHECK CO% 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN” and “Qd”. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed. Check CO%. Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 31. NG >> GO TO 30. SEF172Y 29. CHECK CO% 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed. Check CO%. Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly. 7. After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 31. NG >> GO TO 30. SEF982UA 30. RECONNECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. >> GO TO 34. Revision; 2004 April EC-44 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 31. REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 1. 2. A Stop engine. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 on the malfunctioning bank. EC With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 32. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 33. C 32. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds. 1 time: 2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 34. G 33. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) SIGNAL H Without CONSULT-II 1. Set ECM to Self-diagnostic mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . 2. Switch the monitored sensor to the malfunctioning bank. Refer to EC-68, "How to Switch Monitored Sensor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa" . 3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 34. 34. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I J K L Check the following. ● Check fuel pressure regulator and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-48, "Fuel Pressure Check" . ● Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-162 and EC170 . ● Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-592 . ● Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC182 and EC-194 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 36. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 35. Revision; 2004 April D EC-45 2003 G35 Coupe M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 35. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed. Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-38, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" . >> GO TO 4. 36. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL124, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" . >> GO TO 4. Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ABS0037G DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ABS0037H DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Idle Air Volume Learning ABS0037I DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: ● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. ● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. ● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) ● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) ● PNP switch: ON ● Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) Revision; 2004 April EC-46 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light only small lamps. A Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) Vehicle speed: Stopped EC Transmission: Warmed-up For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less than 0.9V. For models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. C ● ● ● OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. D E F G H SEF217Z I 6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. J K L SEF454Y 7. 8. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed A/T: 650±50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650±50 rpm (in N position) Ignition timing A/T: 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15±5° BTDC (in N position) M MBIB0238E Without CONSULT-II NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. Revision; 2004 April EC-47 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. a. b. 8. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Fully release the accelerator pedal. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. SEC897C 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed A/T: 650±50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650±50 rpm (in N position) Ignition timing A/T: 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15±5° BTDC (in N position) 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-128, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: ● Engine stalls. ● Erroneous idle. Fuel Pressure Check ABS0037J FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision; 2004 April EC-48 2003 G35 Coupe BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 2. 3. 4. 5. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. A EC C SEF214Y D Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. E F G PBIB1094E FUEL PRESSURE CHECK H Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: ● Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V35 models do not have fuel return system. ● Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit (J-44321) to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-48, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 2. Install the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting between fuel damper and injector tube. 3. Connect the fuel pressure test gauge (quick connector adapter hose) to the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. At idling: 7. 8. Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. Check the following. ● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging ● Fuel filter for clogging ● Fuel pump ● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. Revision; 2004 April J K L M PBIB1662E EC-49 I 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction PFP:00028 ABS0037K The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of SAE J1979 Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of SAE J1979 System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Freeze Frame data Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of SAE J1979 Calibration ID Mode 9 of SAE J1979 The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. DTC Freeze Frame data 1st trip DTC ×: Applicable 1st trip Freeze Frame data —: Not applicable SRT code Test value CONSULT-II × × × × × — GST × ×*1 × — × × ECM × ×*2 — — — — *1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display. *2: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-80 .) Two Trip Detection Logic ABS0037L When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. ×: Applicable MIL DTC 1st trip Items 2nd trip —: Not applicable 1st trip DTC 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying — — — × — × — — × — — × — — × — — — — — × — × × — Blinking Lighting up Blinking Lighting up Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0306 is being detected × — — Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0306 is being detected — — One trip detection diagnoses (Refer to EC-8 .) — Except above — When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. Revision; 2004 April EC-50 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut Emission-Related Diagnostic Information ABS0037M EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC Reference page 3 GST*2 ECM* CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*6 — — — EC-140 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*6 — — × EC-140 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — — — — INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — × EC-143 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 — — × EC-143 HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 × × 5 ×* EC-146 HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 × × ×*5 EC-146 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 × × 5 ×* EC-154 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 × × ×*5 EC-154 HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 × × ×*5 EC-146 HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 × × ×*5 EC-146 5 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 × × ×* EC-154 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 × × ×*5 EC-154 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — — EC-162 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 — — — EC-170 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 — — — EC-170 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — × EC-177 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — × EC-177 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 — — — EC-182 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 — — — EC-182 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — — EC-187 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — — EC-187 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — — EC-194 IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — × EC-197 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — × EC-200 HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 × × ×*5 EC-202 HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 × × ×*5 EC-212 HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 × × ×*5 EC-225 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × × ×*5 EC-235 5 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × ×* EC-245 HO2S1 (B2) P0152 0152 × × ×*5 EC-202 HO2S1 (B2) P0153 0153 × × ×*5 EC-212 HO2S1 (B2) P0154 0154 × × ×*5 EC-225 Revision; 2004 April A EC-51 2003 G35 Coupe EC C D E F G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC Reference page 3 GST*2 ECM* HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 × × ×*5 EC-235 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × × ×*5 EC-245 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — × EC-257 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — × EC-266 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — — × EC-257 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — — × EC-266 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — × EC-274 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — × EC-279 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — × EC-279 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — — EC-283 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — — EC-283 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — × EC-290 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — × EC-290 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — × EC-290 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — × EC-290 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — × EC-290 CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — — × EC-290 CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — — × EC-290 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — × EC-296 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — × EC-296 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — × EC-301 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — × EC-307 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 — — × EC-307 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × ×*5 EC-315 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 × × ×*5 EC-315 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × ×*5 EC-320 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × ×*5 EC-325 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — × EC-335 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — — × EC-335 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — × EC-342 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — — × EC-349 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 — — × EC-352 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 — — × EC-358 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — × ×*5 EC-366 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*4 × ×*5 EC-374 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — × EC-384 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — × EC-386 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — × EC-388 P0500 0500 — — × EC-390 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — × EC-392 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — × EC-394 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*7 Revision; 2004 April EC-52 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC Reference page A EC 3 GST*2 ECM* PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — × EC-396 ECM P0605 0605 — — × or — EC-401 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — × AT-105 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — — × AT-146 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*7 P0720 0720 — — × AT-110 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 — — × AT-115 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — × AT-117 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — × AT-122 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — × AT-127 ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — × EC-404 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — × EC-408 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — — EC-415 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — — EC-417 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — — EC-423 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — — EC-423 ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — — EC-428 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P1136 1136 — — × EC-408 HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 × × ×*5 EC-433 HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 × × ×*5 EC-439 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × ×*5 EC-446 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × ×*5 EC-458 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — — EC-470 HO2S1 (B2) P1163 1163 × × ×*5 EC-433 HO2S1 (B2) P1164 1164 × × ×*5 EC-439 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 × × ×*5 EC-446 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 × × ×*5 EC-458 CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — — — EC-470 TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — — × EC-472 TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — × EC-473 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — — EC-474 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — × EC-486 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — × EC-488 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — — EC-490 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 — — × EC-495 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 — — × EC-503 ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — — EC-510 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — — EC-517 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — — EC-533 NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 P1615 1610 - 1615 — — × EC-66 TPV SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 — — — AT-144 Revision; 2004 April EC-53 2003 G35 Coupe C D E F G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC Reference page 3 GST*2 ECM* P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — × EC-535 TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 1716 — — × AT-152 A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — — — AT-159 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 — — — AT-170 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 — — — AT-175 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 — — — AT-179 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1759 1759 — — — AT-184 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 — — — AT-189 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 — — — AT-194 HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 — — — AT-198 HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 — — — AT-203 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 — — — AT-208 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 — — — AT-213 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — × EC-544 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — — EC-550 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — — EC-550 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — — EC-557 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — — EC-557 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — — EC-564 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — — EC-571 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG. *5: This is not displayed with GST. *6: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *7: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates. DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-51, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/ component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II. 1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-76, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC ConfirRevision; 2004 April EC-54 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM mation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair. A How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. EC With CONSULT-II With GST CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc. C These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) No Tools The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. D Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc. These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. E ● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if F available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times G the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0]. If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t]. H I J PBIB0911E K FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For details, see EC-111, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 Items Freeze frame data 2 3 Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malRevision; 2004 April EC-55 2003 G35 Coupe L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory. Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979. As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains “CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased. Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items. NOTE: The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours. If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested. NOTE: If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. Revision; 2004 April EC-56 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM SRT Item A The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. SRT item (CONSULT-II indication) Performance Priority*1 Corresponding DTC No. Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430 EVAP SYSTEM 1 EVAP control system P0442 2 EVAP control system P0456 2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 2 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0132, P0152 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0133, P0153 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0134, P0154 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1143, P1163 HO2S HO2S HTR 2 EC C D E Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1144, P1164 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0138, P0158 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139, P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1146, P1166 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1147, P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 F G *1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for models with CONSULT-II. H I SRT Set Timing SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is shown in the table below. Example Self-diagnosis result All OK Case 1 Case 2 NG exists Case 3 K Ignition cycle ← ON → OFF ← ON → Diagnosis ← ON → P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1) OFF OFF ← ON → P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK OK — — P0402 — — — — P1402 NG — NG NG (Consecutive NG) (1st trip) DTC 1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC DTC (= MIL “ON”) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. Revision; 2004 April EC-57 J 2003 G35 Coupe L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM —: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following reasons: ● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. ● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. ● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. ● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. NOTE: SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. SRT Service Procedure If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page. Revision; 2004 April EC-58 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF573XA *1 EC-55 *2 EC-59 *3 EC-60 How to Display SRT Code WITH CONSULT-II Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right. “INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set. WITH GST Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) Revision; 2004 April EC-59 SEF935Z 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM How to Set SRT Code To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. WITH CONSULT-II Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table on EC-57, "SRT Item" . WITHOUT CONSULT-II The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. Revision; 2004 April EC-60 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Driving Pattern A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1053E Revision; 2004 April EC-61 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc. Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest. Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within zone A. *: Normal conditions refer to the following: ● Sea level ● Flat road ● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) ● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed. Pattern 1: ● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). ● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V). ● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V). Pattern 2: ● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. Pattern 3: ● The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times. Pattern 4: ● Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes. ● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving. ● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again. *1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again. *2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern. 1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle. 2. Repeat driving pattern shown at right at least 10 times. – During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. *3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. ● SEF414S Suggested Transmission Gear Position Set the selector lever in the D position. Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. Revision; 2004 April EC-62 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and high altitude areas [over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: Gear change ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH) 1st to 2nd 21 (13) 13 (8) 24 (15) 2nd to 3rd 37 (23) 26 (16) 40 (25) 3rd to 4th 48 (30) 40 (25) 64 (40) 4th to 5th 60 (37) 45 (28) 72 (45) 6th 68 (42) 53 (33) 80 (50) EC C Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road conditions to ensure sage operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear km/h (MPH) 1st 56 (35) 2nd 96 (60) 3rd 136 (85) 4th — 5th — 6th — H ×: Applicable Test value (GST display) Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) CATALYST Three way catalyst function (Bank 2) EVAP SYSTEM Revision; 2004 April Test limit Application 01H Max. × 02H 81H Min. × 03H 02H Max. × 04H 82H Min. × TID CID 01H I J K —: Not applicable EVAP control system (Small leak) 05H 03H Max. × EVAP control system purge flow monitoring 06H 83H Min. × EVAP control system (Very small leak) 07H 03H Max. × EC-63 E G The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979. The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (30 test items). These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen. Self-diagnostic test item D F TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II) SRT item A 2003 G35 Coupe L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Test value (GST display) SRT item Self-diagnostic test item Heated oxygen sensor 1 (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 1 (Bank 2) HO2S Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) HO2S HTR Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2) Test limit Application 04H Max. × 0AH 84H Min. × 0BH 04H Max. × 0CH 04H Max. × 0DH 04H Max. × 11H 05H Max. × 12H 85H Min. × 13H 05H Max. × 14H 05H Max. × 15H 05H Max. × 19H 86H Min. × 1AH 86H Min. × TID CID 09H 1BH 06H Max. × 1CH 06H Max. × 21H 87H Min. × 22H 87H Min. × 23H 07H Max. × 24H 07H Max. × 29H 08H Max. × 2AH 88H Min. × 2BH 09H Max. × 2CH 89H Min. × 2DH 0AH Max. × 2EH 8AH Min. × 2FH 0BH Max. × 30H 8BH Min. × HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION How to Erase DTC WITH CONSULT-II The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip steps 2 through 4. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”. 3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” twice. 5. Touch “ENGINE”. 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Revision; 2004 April EC-64 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM 7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) A EC C D E F G H I J SCIA5671E WITH GST The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST. NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform AT-96, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) 3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). 1. 2. 3. ● ● – – – – – NO TOOLS If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Diagnostic trouble codes 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes Freeze frame data 1st trip freeze frame data System readiness test (SRT) codes Revision; 2004 April EC-65 2003 G35 Coupe K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Test values Others Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. – – IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) ● ● ● ABS0037N If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to BL-122, "IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)" . Confirm no self-diagnostic results of IVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. When replacing ECM, initialization of IVIS (NATS) system SEF543X and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS) initialization and IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, IVIS/NVIS. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ABS0037O DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-32, "WARNING LAMPS" , or see EC-628 . 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. SEF217U Revision; 2004 April EC-66 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION A The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions. Diagnostic Test Mode KEY and ENG. Status Function Explanation of Function Mode I Ignition switch in ON position BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.). If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. EC C Engine stopped D Engine running Mode II Ignition switch in ON position MALFUNCTION WARNING This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected. The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in the 1st trip. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) ● One trip detection diagnoses E F G This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read. H Engine stopped I Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read. J K When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut MIL Flashing Without DTC If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diagnostic test mode. EC-68, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later. EC68, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. ● Diagnostic trouble codes ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data ● System readiness test (SRT) codes ● Test values ● Others Revision; 2004 April EC-67 2003 G35 Coupe L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. ● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF. How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Fully release the accelerator pedal. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts blinking. Fully release the accelerator pedal. ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). PBIB0092E How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor) 1. 2. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-68, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . Start Engine. ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). ECM will start heated oxygen sensor 1 monitoring from the bank 1 sensor. How to Switch Monitored Sensor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa 1. 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal quickly and then release it immediately. Make sure that monitoring sensor has changed by MIL blinking as follows. PBIB0093E How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. 3. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-68, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds. The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. Revision; 2004 April EC-68 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI32, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-628 . DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING MIL A EC Condition ON When the malfunction is detected. OFF No malfunction. C This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS) DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS D In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below. The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code. E F G H I J K SEF952W A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle. The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle. A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF. In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. (See EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" ) How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC68, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours. ● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses. DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated oxygen sensor 1. Revision; 2004 April EC-69 2003 G35 Coupe L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM MIL Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas ON Lean OFF Rich *Remains ON or OFF Any condition Air fuel ratio feedback control condition Closed loop system Open loop system *: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop. To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge. Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the MIL comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load. OBD System Operation Chart ABS0037P RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS ● ● ● ● ● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory. When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-50, "Two Trip Detection Logic" . The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the counter will reset. The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip. SUMMARY CHART Items MIL (goes off) DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 1st Trip DTC (clear) 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) Fuel Injection System Misfire Other 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B) For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-72 . For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see EC-74 . *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip. Revision; 2004 April EC-70 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” , “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF392S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared at the moment OK is detected. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. Revision; 2004 April EC-71 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART) Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: ● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F). ● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F). Example: If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions: Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C (158°F) ● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above. ● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction. ● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. ● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. Revision; 2004 April EC-72 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF393S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehicle is driven once (pattern B) without the same malfunction. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. Revision; 2004 April EC-73 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” AEC574 ● ● ● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4). The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40. Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART). Revision; 2004 April EC-74 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Introduction PFP:00004 A ABS0037Q INTRODUCTION The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine. EC C D MEF036D It is much more difficult to diagnose a incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. E F G H SEF233G I A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-76 . Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example on EC-78 should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. J K L SEF234G M Revision; 2004 April EC-75 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW Flow Chart PBIB1043E *1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” is other than [0] or [1t], perform EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . *2 If the incident cannot be verified, per- *3 form EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . If the on board diagnostic system cannot be performed, check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to EC-133, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" . *4 If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . *5 EC-61 EC-128 Revision; 2004 April *6 EC-76 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Description for Work Flow STEP A DESCRIPTION STEP I Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the EC-77, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . STEP II Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-64 .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV. If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The Symptom Matrix Chart will be useful. See EC-86 .) Also check related service bulletins for information. STEP III Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs. The DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V. STEP IV Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the DTC Confirmation Procedure. Check and read the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST. During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . In case the DTC Confirmation Procedure is not available, perform the Overall Function Check instead. The (1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified check is an effective alternative. The NG result of the Overall Function Check is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection. STEP V Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV. If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX. If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-81 .) Then perform inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-86 .) STEP VI Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) Harness Layouts. Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-98 , EC-122 . The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . Repair or replace the malfunction parts. If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . STEP VII Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint. Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-38, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .) DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Description There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting. Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples: ● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. Revision; 2004 April EC-77 SEF907L 2003 G35 Coupe EC C D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. Worksheet Sample MTBL0017 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ABS0037R If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. NOTE: If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-140 . Revision; 2004 April EC-78 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Priority 1 2 3 Detected items (DTC) A ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line ● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor ● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor ● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor ● P0128 Thermostat function ● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P1229 P2135 Throttle position sensor ● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor ● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● P0460 P0461 P0462 Fuel level sensor ● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor ● P0605 ECM ● P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch ● P1229 Sensor power supply ● P1610 - P1615 NATS ● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch ● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor ● P0031P0032 P0051 P0052 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ● P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ● P0132 P0133 P0134 P0152 P0153 P0154 P1143 P1144 P1163 P1164 Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 P1146 P1147 P1166 P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring ● P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve ● P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor ● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor ● P0710 P0720 P0725 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1705 P1716 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759 P1762 P1764 P1767 P1769 P1772 P1774 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches C D E F ● P1065 ECM power supply ● P1111 P1136 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve ● P1122 Electric throttle control function ● P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT) ● P1805 Brake switch ● P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control ● P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function ● P0300 - P0306 Misfire ● P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function ● P0442 P0456 EVAP control system ● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system ● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1148 P1168 Closed loop control ● P1211 TCS control unit ● P1212 TCS communication line ● P1564 ASCD steering switch ● P1572 ASCD brake switch ● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor Revision; 2004 April EC G H I J K L EC-79 M 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Fail-Safe Chart ABS0037S When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Condition Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or Start 80°C (176°F) Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P2135 Throttle position sensor ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. P1121 Electric throttle control actuator (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction:) ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. (When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:) ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. (When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:) While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. ● P1122 Electric throttle control function ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Revision; 2004 April Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut EC-80 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Basic Inspection ABS0037T 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. A Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. EC Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections C Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks D Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. F Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature G indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. H I SEF976U J 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-81 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under noload, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. SEF978U 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. A/T: M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) SEF058Y Without CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. 1. 2. A/T: M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-82 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A Refer to EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. EC C 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN D With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. A/T: M/T: E 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. G 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) H A/T: M/T: OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-307 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-301 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. K L 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. M Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC66, "IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . >> GO TO 4. Revision; 2004 April EC-83 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. A/T: M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) 15 ± 5° BTDC (in N position) OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. PBIB1655E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 14. NO >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. A/T: M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. A/T: M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. Revision; 2004 April EC-84 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. A/T: M/T: EC 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) 15 ± 5° BTDC (in N position) C OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 16. D PBIB1655E E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-50, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. F G 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-307 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-301 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. I J 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. K Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC66, "IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . L M >> GO TO 4. Revision; 2004 April EC-85 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Matrix Chart ABS0037U SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM 1 1 2 3 2 Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 Air Positive crankcase ventilation system 4 4 4 3 3 Incorrect idle speed adjustment Ignition BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Fuel pump circuit EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION Fuel EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AD SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AC IDLING VIBRATION HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT AB ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING ENGINE STALL AA Warranty symptom code HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 2 2 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 1 2 4 3 4 2 Reference page EC-598 4 EC-48 2 EC-592 4 4 EC-630 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 EC-642 EC-35 1 1 2 3 3 Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-35 Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-580 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 Main power supply and ground circuit Mass air flow sensor circuit 2 3 2 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 EC-182, EC-194 3 3 Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 Knock sensor circuit 2 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-550, EC-557 , EC-571 1 3 2 2 Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 EC-296 EC-301 2 Vehicle speed signal circuit Revision; 2004 April 2 EC-202, EC-212 , EC-225 , EC-433 , EC-439 EC-187, EC-283 , EC-486 , EC-488 , EC-490 , EC-564 Throttle position sensor circuit Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit EC-133 EC-162, EC-170 1 1 2 EC-415, EC-417 Electric throttle control actuator EC-307 3 3 3 3 EC-86 3 EC-390 EC-396 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYMPTOM ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) ECM HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-401, EC-404 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-408 3 3 3 3 3 EC-535 3 4 EC-604 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit PNP switch circuit Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 Electrical load signal circuit Air conditioner circuit A 3 2 2 VDC/TCS/ABS control unit 3 3 3 3 3 EC Reference page C D E F G H EC-609 3 3 3 2 4 ATC-42 BRC-15 I 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) J SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER Fuel Fuel tank ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA K Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 Revision; 2004 April EM-34 — 5 Valve deposit Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane) Reference page FL-11 5 Vapor lock L — 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 — EC-87 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Air ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA Air duct EM-14 Air cleaner EM-14 Air leakage from air duct (Mass air flow sensor — electric throttle control actuator) Electric throttle control actuator 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-14 5 5 EM-16 Air leakage from intake manifold/ Collector/Gasket Cranking EM-16, EM-20 Battery Generator circuit SC-4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SC-20 Starter circuit 3 Signal plate 6 EM-98 4 AT-105 or MT-12 PNP switch Engine Reference page SC-10 1 Cylinder head Cylinder head gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 3 EM-81 Cylinder block Piston 4 Piston ring Connecting rod 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-98 Bearing Crankshaft Valve mechanism Timing chain EM-50 Camshaft Intake valve timing control EM-66 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-50 5 Intake valve 3 Exhaust valve Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ Gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-81 EM-22, EX3 Three way catalyst Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil Revision; 2004 April 5 5 5 5 EM-26, LU12 , LU-9 , LU-10 LU-6 EC-88 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYMPTOM Cooling HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code A AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 C D E F CO-24 4 Water gallery 5 CO-20 G CO-26 Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) Reference page CO-12, CO-16 Thermostat Water pump EC 5 1 CO-9 EC-66 or BL-122 1 H I 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-89 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location ABS0037V PBIB1272E Revision; 2004 April EC-90 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1273E Revision; 2004 April EC-91 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PBIB1274E Revision; 2004 April EC-92 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A EC C D E F PBIB1189E G H I PBIB1284E J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-93 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PBIB1275E Revision; 2004 April EC-94 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1276E Revision; 2004 April EC-95 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Circuit Diagram ABS0037W TBWT0251E Revision; 2004 April EC-96 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0252E Revision; 2004 April EC-97 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ABS0037X PBIB1192E ECM Terminals and Reference Value ABS0037Y PREPARATION 1. 2. ECM is located behind the passenger side instrument lower panel. For this inspection, remove passenger side instrument lower panel. Remove ECM harness connector. PBIB1278E 3. 4. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown at right. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. ● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. ● Data is for comparison and may not be exact. SEC406D ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Revision; 2004 April Idle speed EC-98 DATA (DC Voltage) Engine ground 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A Approximately 8V EC [Engine is running] 2 Y Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm. C PBIB0519E [Engine is running] ● 3 W/R Throttle control motor relay power supply Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. [Ignition switch: ON] D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E 0 - 14V F [Ignition switch: ON] 4 BR Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is releasing G PBIB1104E H 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 G Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is depressing I PBIB1105E J [Engine is running] ● 6 BR/W Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: after warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) K 0 - 1.0V L [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped [Engine is running] ● M BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 7 - 12V 10 W/G Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm quickly PBIB1790E Revision; 2004 April EC-99 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 7 - 12V 11 R/W Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm quickly PBIB1790E [Engine is running] 12 L/W Power steering pressure sensor ● Steering wheel is being turned. [Engine is running] ● Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.5 - 4.5V 0.4 - 0.8V Approximately 1.2V [Engine is running] 13 BR ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Crankshaft position sensor (POS) PBIB1041E Approximately 1.1V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB1042E 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] 14 Y ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1039E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB1040E 15 W Knock sensor [Engine is running] ● Idle speed Approximately 2.5V [Engine is running] 16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) Revision; 2004 April ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. EC-100 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A BATTERY VOLTAGE EC (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 21 22 23 G R/Y R/B ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Injector No. 5 Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 C SEC984C D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. F SEC985C G Approximately 8V [Engine is running] 24 G/B Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm. H I PBIB0519E [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) J [Engine is running] 25 P/B ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: after warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) K 0 - 1.0V L [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped [Engine is running] ● 32 P EVAP control system pressure sensor Revision; 2004 April BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. [Ignition switch: ON] EC-101 Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] 33 OR ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1039E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 1) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB1040E 34 Y/G Intake air temperature sensor W/B Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with intake air temperature. [Engine is running] 35 ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 40 41 42 P R/L R/W ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Injector No. 6 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEC985C Revision; 2004 April EC-102 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A BATTERY VOLTAGE EC (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● 45 L/Y C Idle speed SEC990C EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine). F SEC991C G 47 B Sensors' power supply (Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 48 B/Y Sensors' power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V H 49 W/L Sensors' power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V I [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V K [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed J Less than 4.75V L [Engine is running] 51 OR ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Mass air flow sensor 0.9 - 1.2V M [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. 1.6 - 1.9V [Engine is running] 55 R/Y ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) – Revision; 2004 April 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. EC-103 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.2V [Engine is running] 60 61 62 PU/W L/R Y/R ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 SEC986C 0.1 - 0.4V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. SEC987C [Engine is running] 66 67 68 W/R B/W Y Sensors' ground (Throttle position sensor) Sensors' ground (Mass air flow sensor / IAT sensor / Power steering pressure sensor / EVAP control system pressure sensor / ASCD steering switch) Sensors' power supply (Power steering pressure sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0V Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 R/L Throttle position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 0.36V [Engine is running] 70 73 R/B Y/B Refrigerant pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON. (Compressor operates.) [Engine is running] 1.0 - 4.0V Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with engine coolant temperature. [Engine is running] 74 L/B ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) – Revision; 2004 April 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. EC-104 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC Approximately 0V 0 - 0.2V C [Engine is running] 79 80 81 GY/R GY G/R ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 D SEC986C E 0.1 - 0.4V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. F G SEC987C [Engine is running] 82 GY/L Sensors' ground (APP sensor 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V H Approximately 0V I Approximately 5V - Battery voltage (11 - 14V) J [Engine is running] 83 85 B/R PU Sensors' ground (APP sensor 2) Data link connector ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] ● CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected. 86 R CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V Output voltage varies with the communication status. 90 BR/Y Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 G Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V Output voltage varies with the communication status. L [Ignition switch: ON] 98 LG/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 Revision; 2004 April K ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.15 - 0.60V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed EC-105 1.95 - 2.40V 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch is released. [Ignition switch: ON] ● 99 G/Y ASCD steering switch CRUISE switch is pressed. [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch is pressed. [Ignition switch: ON] ● COAST/SET switch is pressed. [Ignition switch: ON] ● ACCEL/RESUME switch is pressed. [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 P/L Stop lamp switch Brake pedal is fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 G/OR PNP switch Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) [Ignition switch: ON] ● 104 G/W Throttle control motor relay Except the above gear position DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 4V Approximately 0V Approximately 1V Approximately 2V Approximately 3V Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] 106 107 BR L/OR Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.5 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Engine is running] 3.9 - 4.7V Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel tank temperature. [Ignition switch: ON] 108 SB ● Brake pedal is depressed (A/T models) ● Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed (M/T models) ASCD brake switch Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 109 W/L Ignition switch ● Brake pedal is fully released (A/T models) ● Brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released (M/T models) [Ignition switch: OFF] 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Revision; 2004 April BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF EC-106 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION A DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] ● 113 B/OR Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON EC 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON. [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C Engine ground D 115 116 B/R B ECM ground 117 GY/L EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 P L Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 121 R/W Power supply for ECM (Buck-up) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● Idle speed E F : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) CONSULT-II Function ABS0037Z G FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on the CONSULT-II unit. Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.* Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. Data monitor (SPEC) Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the other data monitor items can be read. CAN diagnostic support monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance. ECM part number ECM part number can be read. *: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. ● Diagnostic trouble codes ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data ● System readiness test (SRT) codes ● Test values ● Others Revision; 2004 April EC-107 H I J K L M 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS INPUT ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS Item WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR DATA MONITOR (SPEC) DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION ACTIVE TEST SRT STATUS DTC WORK SUPPORT DTC*1 FREEZE FRAME DATA*2 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × × Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × × × Mass air flow sensor × × × Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × Heated oxygen sensor 1 × × × × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × × Vehicle speed sensor × × × Accelerator pedal position sensor × × × Throttle position sensor × × × Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × EVAP control system pressure sensor × × × Intake air temperature sensor × × × Knock sensor × Refrigerant pressure sensor × × Closed throttle position switch (accelerator pedal position sensor signal) × × Air conditioner switch × × × × × Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × × Stop lamp switch × × × Power steering pressure sensor × × × Battery voltage × × Load signal × × Fuel level sensor × × × ASCD steering switch × × × ASCD brake switch × × × ASCD clutch switch × × × Revision; 2004 April EC-108 × × 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE OUTPUT DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION DATA MONITOR DATA MONITOR (SPEC) ACTIVE TEST Injectors × × × Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × × × × × × × × × × × × Item ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS WORK SUPPORT DTC*1 Throttle control motor relay × Throttle control motor × EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve × FREEZE FRAME DATA*2 Air conditioner relay Fuel pump relay × SRT STATUS D × × E × × × Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater × × × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × Intake valve timing control solenoid valve × Calculated load value F G H X: Applicable *1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. *2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-55 . INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. EC C Cooling fan relay EVAP canister vent control valve DTC WORK SUPPORT A I J Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener handle. Turn ignition switch ON. K L M PHIA0096E 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. MBIB0233E Revision; 2004 April EC-109 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 5. Touch “ENGINE”. If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . SEF995X 6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. PBIB2308E WORK SUPPORT MODE Work Item WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING START DURING IDLING. CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS. When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM. When learning the idle air volume SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT. When clearing the coefficient of self-learning control value EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS. ● IGN SW ON ● ENGINE NOT RUNNING ● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F). ● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM ● When detecting EVAP vapor leak point of EVAP system FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F). ● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE ● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION. NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY. Revision; 2004 April EC-110 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition timing After adjustment, confirm target ignition timing with a timing light. A EC *: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure. C SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE Self Diagnostic Item Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) D Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data Freeze frame data item* DIAG TROUBLE CODE [PXXXX] FUEL SYS-B1 Description E ● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● One mode in the following is displayed. Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment) Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop FUEL SYS-B2 CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F] ● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than short-term fuel trim. ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule. L-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%] S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] S-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%] G H I ENGINE SPEED [rpm] ● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. VEHICL SPEED [km/ h] or [mph] ● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] ● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] ● J K L M The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. *: This item is the same as that of 1st trip freeze frame data. Revision; 2004 April F EC-111 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DATA MONITOR MODE Monitored Item Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS ×: Applicable MAIN SIGNALS Description ● ENG SPEED [rpm] × × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × × B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] × A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] × ● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed. ● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. ● COOLAN TEMP/S [°C] or [°F] × × HO2S1 (B1) [V] × × HO2S1 (B2) [V] × HO2S2 (B1) [V] × HO2S2 (B2) [V] × HO2S1 MNTR (B1) [RICH/LEAN] × HO2S1 MNTR (B2) [RICH/LEAN] × HO2S2 MNTR (B1) [RICH/LEAN] × HO2S2 MNTR (B2) [RICH/LEAN] × VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] × × BATTERY VOLT [V] × ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × THRTL SEN 1 [V] × THRTL SEN 2 [V] × FUEL T/TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] × Revision; 2004 April × Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and CMPS (PHASE). The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. ● The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 1 is displayed. ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is displayed. ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal during air-fuel ratio feedback control: RICH: means the mixture became “rich”, and control is being affected toward a leaner mixture. LEAN: means the mixture became “lean”, and control is being affected toward a rich mixture. ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal: RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small. LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large. ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed. × ● The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed. × ● The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is displayed. × ● The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● The fuel temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed. EC-112 Remarks ● Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed drops below the idle rpm. ● If the signal is interrupted while the engine is running, an abnormal value may be indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. ● When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed. ● After turning ON the ignition switch, “RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mixture ratio feedback control begins. ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback is clamped, the value just before the clamping is displayed continuously. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] × × EVAP SYS PRES [V] FUEL LEVEL SE [V] Monitored item [Unit] START SIGNAL [ON/OFF] ● The intake air temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated. × ● The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed. × ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed. ● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by the ECM according to the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. ● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch as determined by the air conditioner signal. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/ neutral position (PNP) switch signal. ● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system (determined by the signal voltage of the power steering pressure sensor signal) is indicated. × × CLSD THL POS [ON/OFF] × × AIR COND SIG [ON/OFF] × × P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF] × × PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/OFF] Description × × ● LOAD SIGNAL [ON/OFF] × × ● HEATER FAN SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan switch signal. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated by ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to the input signals. ● “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current air flow divided by peak air flow. ● Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM according to the signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor. ● Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. ● The opening becomes larger as the value increases. INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] × INJ PULSE-B2 [msec] IGN TIMING [BTDC] CAL/LD VALUE [%] MASS AIRFLOW [g·m/s] × PURG VOL C/V [%] Revision; 2004 April C D ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal. E F G H I J Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch signal. × EC-113 A EC Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load signal. ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/ or lighting switch is in 2nd position. OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and lighting switch are OFF. IGNITION SW [ON/OFF] BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] Remarks K L ● When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA] Description ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle. ● The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ● The advance angle becomes larger as the value increases. ● The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the input signals. ● The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON: Closed OFF: Open ● Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condition determined by the ECM according to the input signals. ● The control condition of the cooling fan (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. HI: High speed operation LOW: Low speed operation OFF: Stop ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 1 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals. I/P PULLY SPD [rpm] ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the turbine revolution sensor signal. VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] or [MPH] ● Indicates the vehicle speed computed from the revolution sensor signal. ● Display the condition of idle air volume learning YET: Idle air volume learning has not been performed yet. CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has already been performed successfully. ● Distance traveled while MIL is activated. ● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. INT/V TIM (B2) [°CA] INT/V SOL (B1) [%] INT/V SOL (B2) [%] AIR COND RLY [ON/OFF] × FUEL PUMP RLY [ON/OFF] × VENT CONT/V [ON/OFF] THRTL RELAY [ON/OFF] COOLING FAN [HI/LOW/OFF] HO2S1 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] HO2S1 HTR (B2) [ON/OFF] HO2S2 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] HO2S2 HTR (B2) [ON/OFF] IDL A/V LEARN [YET/CMPLT] TRVL AFTER MIL [km] or [mile] O2SEN HTR DTY [%] Revision; 2004 April EC-114 Remarks 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS Description AC PRESS SEN [V] ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is displayed. VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is displayed. SET VHCL SPD [km/h] or [mph] ● The preset vehicle speed is displayed. MAIN SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CRUISE switch signal. CANCEL SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal. RESUME/ACC SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ACCEL/ RES switch signal. SET SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from COAST/ SET switch signal. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake switch signal, and ASCD clutch switch signal (M/T models). BRAKE SW1 [ON/OFF] BRAKE SW2 [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. VHCL SPD CUT [NON/CUT] ● LO SPEED CUT [NON/CUT] AT OD CANCEL [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel signal sent from the TCM. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. SET LAMP [ON/OFF] C D E F G H I J K Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D according to the input signal from the TCM. ● L M Voltage [V] Frequency [msec], [Hz] or [%] DUTY-HI DUTY-LOW ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width measured by the probe. PLS WIDTH-HI ● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to be measured. ● Figures with “#”s are temporary ones. They are the same figures as an actual piece of data which was just previously measured. PLS WIDTH-LOW NOTE: ● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. Revision; 2004 April EC-115 A EC Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. AT OD MONITOR [ON/OFF] CRUISE LAMP [ON/OFF] Remarks 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE Monitored Item ECM input signals Main signals ENG SPEED [rpm] × × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × × Monitored item [Unit] B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] Description ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS). ● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor specification is displayed. ● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. × ● A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] × The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. Remarks ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. NOTE: Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. ACTIVE TEST MODE Test Item TEST ITEM CONDITION ● FUEL INJECTION IGNITION TIMING POWER BALANCE COOLING FAN* ENG COOLANT TEMP FUEL PUMP RELAY ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II. JUDGEMENT If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) ● Harness and connectors ● Fuel injectors ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning. ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Timing light: Set ● Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT-II. ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. ● Harness and connectors ● Compression ● A/C switch OFF ● Fuel injectors If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. Engine runs rough or dies. ● Shift lever N ● Power transistor ● Cut off each injector signal one at a time using CONSULT-II. ● Spark plugs ● Ignition coils ● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors ● Turn the cooling fan “HI", “LOW” and “OFF” using CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan motor ● IPDM E/R ● Harness and connectors ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Fuel injectors ● Harness and connectors ● Fuel pump relay ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF” using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. Revision; 2004 April Cooling fan moves and stops. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound. EC-116 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TEST ITEM PURG VOL CONT/V FUEL/T TEMP SEN VENT CONTROL/V V/T ASSIGN ANGLE CONDITION JUDGEMENT ● Engine: After warming up, run engine at 1,500 rpm. ● Change the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve opening percent using CONSULT-II. A Engine speed changes according to the opening percent. ● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” with the CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Change intake valve timing using CONSULT-II. CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve EC C Solenoid valve makes an operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve D E If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. ● Harness and connectors ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve F *: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat. DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE SRT STATUS Mode G For details, refer to EC-56, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" . H SRT Work Support Mode This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. DTC Work Support Mode Test mode EVAP SYSTEM HO2S1 I Test item Condition PURGE FLOW P0441 EC-320 EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* EC-325 EVAP V/S SML LEAK P0456/P1456* EC-374 PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-495 HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-212 HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-225 HO2S1 (B1) P1143 EC-433 HO2S1 (B1) P1144 EC-439 Refer to corresponding trouble diagnosis for DTC. HO2S1 (B2) P0153 HO2S1 (B2) P0154 H02S2 Reference page EC-212 EC-225 HO2S1 (B2) P1163 EC-433 HO2S1 (B2) P1164 EC-439 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-245 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-446 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-458 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-245 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 EC-446 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 EC-458 *: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to V35 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens. Revision; 2004 April EC-117 2003 G35 Coupe J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) Description CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. 1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): ● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... SEF705Y xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed. The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and “Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL. 2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): ● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM. DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected. SEF707X Revision; 2004 April EC-118 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Operation 1. 2. A “AUTO TRIG” ● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected. EC ● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent. When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo- C nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS in GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .) D “MANU TRIG” ● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for furE ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition. F G H I J K L M PBIB0197E Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ABS00380 DESCRIPTION Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has 8 different functions explained below. ISO9141 is used as the protocol. The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service manual. SEF139P Revision; 2004 April EC-119 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function MODE 1 READINESS TESTS This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information. MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA) This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer toEC-55, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . MODE 3 DTCs This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored by ECM. This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes: MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1) ● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3) ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1) ● Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2) ● Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1) ● Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7) MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving conditions. This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed. ● EVAP canister vent control valve open In the following conditions, this mode cannot function. MODE 8 MODE 9 — (CALIBRATION ID) ● Low ambient temperature ● Low battery voltage ● Engine running ● Ignition switch OFF ● Low fuel temperature ● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect “GST” to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener handle. PHIA0096E Revision; 2004 April EC-120 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in the operation manual. (*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are shown.) A EC C SEF398S D 5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the tool maker. E F G SEF416S H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-121 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00381 Remarks: ● Specification data are reference values. ● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. * Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations. i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication. Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. ● Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 0.9 - 1.2V ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 1.9V ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec ● No-load A/F ALPHA-B1 A/F ALPHA-B2 ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 54% - 155% COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2) ● Engine: After warming up ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Engine: After warming up ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ENG SPEED MAS A/F SE-B1 B/FUEL SCHDL HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) More than 70°C (158°F) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.7V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.3 - 1.2V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF VHCL SPEED SE BATTERY VOLT ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* ● THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CLSD THL POS Revision; 2004 April ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF EC-122 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG P/N POSI SW PW/ST SIGNAL LOAD SIGNAL IGNITION SW HEATER FAN SW BRAKE SW INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2 CONDITION ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.) ON Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON Shift lever: Except above OFF Steering wheel is in neutral position. (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel is turned. ON Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF. OFF Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine PURG VOL C/V Revision; 2004 April Ignition switch: ON ● MASS AIRFLOW AIR COND RLY Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Engine: After warming up CAL/LD VALUE INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2) Ignition switch: ON ● IGN TIMING INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2) Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION A EC C D E ON → OFF → ON Heater fan is operating. ON Heater fan is not operating OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec Idle 13° - 18° BTDC F G H I 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC Idle 5% - 35% 2,500 rpm 5% - 35% Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s Idle 0% 2,000 rpm — Idle −5° - 5°CA When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0° - 30°CA Idle 0% - 2% When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0% - 50% Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates) ON J K L EC-123 M 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MONITOR ITEM FUEL PUMP RLY CONDITION ● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON ● Engine running or cranking SPECIFICATION ON ● Except above conditions OFF VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine ● Air conditioner switch: OFF COOLING FAN Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is 100°C (212°F) or more HI ● Engine: After warming up ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: After warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH) Almost the same speed as the CONSULT-II value ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication ● Ignition switch: ON ● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C (176°F) ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Engine: Idle ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CONSULT-II value. Almost the same speed as the CONSULT-II value SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating. The preset vehicle speed is displayed. MAIN SW Ignition switch: ON CRUISE switch: Pressed ON ● CRUISE switch: Released OFF CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed ON ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF HO2S1 HTR (B1) HO2S1 HTR (B2) HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2) I/P PULLY SPD VEHICLE SPEED TRVL AFTER MIL O2SEN HTR DTY AC PRESS SEN VEH SPEED SE CANCEL SW RESUME/ACC SW SET SW BRAKE SW1 BRAKE SW2 Revision; 2004 April ● ● ● ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON ON OFF ON Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned ON. 0 - 65,535 km (0 - 40,723 mile) Approx. 40% Approx. 0V 1.0 - 4.0V COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON COAST/SET switch: Released OFF Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Fully released ON Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON EC-124 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MONITOR ITEM CONDITION CRUISE LAMP ● SET LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION CRUISE lamp: Illuminated ON CRUISE lamp: Not illuminated OFF SET lamp: Illuminated ON SET lamp: Not illuminated OFF A EC *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal. Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode C ABS00382 The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode. D CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1 Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D, 1st (M/T) position. The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”. E F G H PBIB0198E I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-125 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently. Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary. SEF241Y Revision; 2004 April EC-126 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB0668E Revision; 2004 April EC-127 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Description PFP:00031 ABS00383 The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more malfunctions. The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the MIL. The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: ● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction) ● A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle) ● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) Testing Condition ● ABS00384 Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles) ● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi) Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F) ● Transmission: Warmed-up*1 ● ● Electrical load: Not applied*2 ● Engine speed: Idle *1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F). For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes. *2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight ahead. ● Inspection Procedure ABS00385 NOTE: Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display. 1. Perform EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . 2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. 3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. 5. If NG, go to EC-129, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF601Z Revision; 2004 April EC-128 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Diagnostic Procedure ABS00386 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF613ZD Revision; 2004 April EC-129 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE SEF768Z Revision; 2004 April EC-130 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF615ZA Revision; 2004 April EC-131 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Description PFP:00006 ABS00387 Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. Common I/I Report Situations STEP in Work Flow Situation II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t]. III The symptom described by the customer does not recur. IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area. Diagnostic Procedure ABS00388 1. INSPECTION START Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. Refer to GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , "CIRCUIT INSPECTION", "Ground Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Perform GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , "INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS Refer to GI-24, "How to Check Terminal" , "HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS", “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace connector. Revision; 2004 April EC-132 2003 G35 Coupe POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM Wiring Diagram PFP:24110 A ABS00389 EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0253E Revision; 2004 April EC-133 2003 G35 Coupe POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 109 WIRE COLOR W/L ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Ignition switch [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 P L Power supply for ECM Revision; 2004 April DATA (DC Voltage) A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] EC-134 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2003 G35 Coupe POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0254E Revision; 2004 April EC-135 2003 G35 Coupe POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 115 116 B/R B ECM ground Idle speed [Engine is running] ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) Engine ground Engine ground ABS0038A 1. INSPECTION START Start engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0015E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-136 2003 G35 Coupe POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM 4. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. D 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness connectors F102, M72 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground F G >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II H 1. 2. 3. I Reconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 35 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage J OK or NG OK >> Go to EC-580, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . NG >> GO TO 7. K L PBIB1396E 7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III M 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately 0V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 8. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 16. Revision; 2004 April EC-137 PBIB1630E 2003 G35 Coupe POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM 8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 11. PBIB1191E 9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 33. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-3 ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness or connectors E12, F3 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VII 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 44. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12. Revision; 2004 April EC-138 2003 G35 Coupe POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness or connectors E11, F2 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 13. CHECK 15A FUSE 1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R. 2. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. D E 14. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. F Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. H I 15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness or connectors F102, M72 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground J K >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness connectors. L 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17 . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-139 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 ABS0038B CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name U1000*1 1000*1 U1001*2 DTC detecting condition ● CAN communication line 1001*2 ABS0038C ● ECM cannot communicate to other control units. ECM cannot communicate for more than the specified time. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted) *1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. *2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. ABS0038D Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-142, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision; 2004 April EC-140 2003 G35 Coupe DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Wiring Diagram ABS0038E A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0255E Revision; 2004 April EC-141 2003 G35 Coupe DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Diagnostic Procedure ABS0038F Go to LAN-4, "CAN Communication Unit" . Revision; 2004 April EC-142 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL Description PFP:23796 A ABS0038G SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC Intake valve timing control solenoid valve C Engine speed Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Wheel sensor Vehicle speed Intake valve timing control D E F G H I PBIB1102E This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0038H J K L Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2) INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2) Revision; 2004 April CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load SPECIFICATION M Idle −5° - 5°CA When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0° - 30°CA Idle 0% - 2% When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0% - 50% EC-143 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic Trouble diagnosis name DTC No. P0011 0011 (Bank 1) P0021 0021 (Bank 2) Intake valve timing control performance ABS0038I Detecting condition There is a gap between angle of target and phase-control angle degree. Possible cause ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function. DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0038J CAUTION: Always drive at a safe speed. NOTE: ● If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P1111 or P1136, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111 or P1136. Refer to EC-408 . ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. VHCL SPEED SE 100 - 120 km/h (63 - 75 MPH) ENG SPEED 2,000 - 4,000 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S 60 - 120°C (140 - 248°F) B/FUEL SCHDL More than 7.26 msec Selector lever A/T models: D position M/T models: 5th position 4. 5. 6. SEF353Z Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-145, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) COOLANT TEMPS 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F) Selector lever 1st or 2nd position Driving location uphill Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.) 7. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-145, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision; 2004 April EC-144 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure ABS0038K 1. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) EC Refer to EC-306, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). C 2. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) D Refer to EC-314, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). E F 3. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) Check the following. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end ● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. G H I J SEC905C 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram, refer to EC-302 for CKP sensor (POS), EC-308 and EC-310 for CMP sensor (PHASE). L >> INSPECTION END M Revision; 2004 April EC-145 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER Description PFP:22690 ABS0038L SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature ECM function Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control Actuator Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine is started. OPERATION Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater Above 3,600 OFF Below 3,600 after warming up ON CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0038M Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S1 HTR (B1) HO2S1 HTR (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm SPECIFICATION ON OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0031 0031 (Bank 1) P0051 0051 (Bank 2) P0032 0032 (Bank 1) P0052 0052 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control circuit low Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control circuit high Revision; 2004 April ABS0038N DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater.) The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater.) EC-146 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0038O A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. C WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-151, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F G SEF058Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. ● Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. Select “MODE 3” with GST. If DTC is detected, go to EC-151, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-147 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER Wiring Diagram ABS0038P BANK 1 TBWT0258E Revision; 2004 April EC-148 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 8V [Engine is running] 24 G/B Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm. D E PBIB0519E [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-149 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER BANK 2 TBWT0259E Revision; 2004 April EC-150 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 8V [Engine is running] 2 Y Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm. D E PBIB0519E [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure ABS0038Q G 1. CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. H I J K PBIB1285E 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0969E Revision; 2004 April EC-151 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0031, P0032 24 3 1 P0051, P0052 2 3 2 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-153, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-152 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER Component Inspection ABS0038R A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance 2 and 3 3.3 - 4.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F) 1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) 4 and 1, 2, 3 EC C 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F G PBIB0970E Removal and Installation H ABS0038S HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 I Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-153 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER Description PFP:226A0 ABS0038T SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ECM function Actuator Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater Engine speed Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater Above 3,600 OFF Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ON CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0038U Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2) CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: After warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm ON OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0037 0037 (Bank 1) P0057 0057 (Bank 2) P0038 0038 (Bank 1) P0058 0058 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit low Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit high Revision; 2004 April ABS0038V DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) EC-154 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0038W A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. C WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-159, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF176Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ● Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF”and wait at least 10 seconds. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “MODE 3” with GST. If DTC is detected, go to EC-159, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-155 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER Wiring Diagram ABS0038X BANK 1 TBWT0260E Revision; 2004 April EC-156 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 25 P/B A ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: after warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) C 0 - 1.0V D E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped [Engine is running] ● BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-157 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER BANK 2 TBWT0261E Revision; 2004 April EC-158 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 6 BR/W A ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: after warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) C 0 - 1.0V D E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped [Engine is running] ● BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. Diagnostic Procedure ABS0038Y G 1. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. H I J K PBIB1284E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0969E Revision; 2004 April EC-159 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0037, P0038 25 3 1 P0057, P0058 6 3 2 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER Refer to EC-161, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-160 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER Component Inspection ABS0038Z A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance 2 and 3 5.0 - 7.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F) 1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) 4 and 1, 2, 3 EC C 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F G PBIB0970E Removal and Installation H ABS00390 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 I Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-161 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 ABS00391 The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. PBIB1604E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00392 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load MAS A/F SE-B1 CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW SPECIFICATION Idle Approx. 0.9 - 1.2V 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 1.9V Idle 5% - 35% 2,500 rpm 5% - 35% Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00393 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition A) P0101 0101 Revision; 2004 April ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light load driving condition. Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance problem B) Possible cause A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition. EC-162 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00394 A Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NOTE: If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead of running engine at idle speed. C D With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to EC-166, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E F G SEF174Y H With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. I PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. If engine cannot be started, go to EC-166, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed increases. If NG, go to EC-166, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. K L M SEF243Y Revision; 2004 April EC-163 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR 7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm THRTL SEN 1 More than 3V THRTL SEN 2 More than 3V Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-166, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check PBIB0199E ABS00395 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MODE 1” with GST. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “MODE 1”. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. If NG, go to EC-166, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF534P Revision; 2004 April EC-164 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS00396 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0262E Revision; 2004 April EC-165 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 OR ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Mass air flow sensor 0.9 - 1.2V [Engine is running] 67 B/W Sensors' ground (Mass air flow sensor / IAT sensor / Power steering pressure sensor / EVAP control system pressure sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W ECM relay (Self shut-off) P L Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 1.6 - 1.9V A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ABS00397 1. INSPECTION START Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated? A or B A >> GO TO 3. B >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the following for connection. ● Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. Revision; 2004 April EC-166 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR 3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. EC >> GO TO 4. C D PBIB0986E E 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. F G H PBIB1077E 3. I Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. J Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. K L PBIB1168E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Harness connectors E12, F3 ● Joint connector-3 ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-167 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-3 ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-169, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-168 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Component Inspection ABS00398 A MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Condition Voltage V C Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 1.9 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* EC D E 0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4 PBIB1106E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 4. 5. 6. F If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. ● Turn ignition switch OFF. ● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. ● Perform steps 2 and 3 again. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Removal and Installation G H ABS00399 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-169 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 ABS0039A The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. PBIB1604E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0039B Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load MAS A/F SE-B1 CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW SPECIFICATION Idle Approx. 0.9 - 1.2V 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 1.9V Idle 5% - 35% 2,500 rpm 5% - 35% Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0039C These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0102 0102 P0103 0103 Trouble diagnosis name Mass air flow sensor circuit low input Mass air flow sensor circuit high input DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Mass air flow sensor circuit Revision; 2004 April Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC-170 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0039D NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-173, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E F SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103 With CONSULT-II H 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-173, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC is not detected, go to next step. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-173, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SEF058Y L With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. M Revision; 2004 April EC-171 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS0039E TBWT0262E Revision; 2004 April EC-172 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 OR ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Mass air flow sensor C 0.9 - 1.2V D [Engine is running] 67 B/W Sensors' ground (Mass air flow sensor / IAT sensor / Power steering pressure sensor / EVAP control system pressure sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● W ECM relay (Self shut-off) P L Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 1.6 - 1.9V E [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 A A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V F G 0 - 1.5V H BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) I BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ABS0039F 1. INSPECTION START Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated? P0102 or P0103 P0102 >> GO TO 2. P0103 >> GO TO 3. J K L 2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the following for connection. ● Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. Revision; 2004 April EC-173 M 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR 3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 4. PBIB0986E 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1077E 3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1168E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E12, F3 ● Joint connector-3 ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-174 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. D 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Joint connector-3 ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 8. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. H Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. I 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR J K Refer to EC-169, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. L 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-175 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Component Inspection ABS0039G MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Condition Voltage V Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 1.9 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4 PBIB1106E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Turn ignition switch OFF. ● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. ● Perform steps 2 and 3 again. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. ● 5. 6. Removal and Installation ABS0039H MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Revision; 2004 April EC-176 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A ABS0039I The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. EC C D PBIB1604E E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance F kΩ 25 (77) 3.32 1.94 - 2.06 80 (176) 1.23 0.295 - 0.349 G *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. H CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name ABS0039J DTC detecting condition P0112 0112 Intake air temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0113 0113 Intake air temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure J Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air temperature sensor K L ABS0039K NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-180, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y Revision; 2004 April EC-177 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-178 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS0039L A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0263E Revision; 2004 April EC-179 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ABS0039M 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is built-into) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1077E 4. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and ground. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connectors. PBIB1169E 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-181, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-180 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Component Inspection ABS0039N A INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06 EC If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). C D PBIB1604E E F G SEF012P Removal and Installation H ABS0039O MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-181 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 ABS0039P The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. SEF594K Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V −10 (14) 4.4 Resistance kΩ 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0039Q These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition P0117 0117 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0118 0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Engine coolant temperature sensor FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Condition Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or Start 80°C (176°F) 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) Except as shown above When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. Revision; 2004 April EC-182 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0039R NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-185, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-183 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS0039S TBWT0264E Revision; 2004 April EC-184 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ABS0039T 1. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB0993E 4. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H PBIB0080E 2. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J K Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. L M 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-3 ● Harness for open and short between ECT sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-186, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Revision; 2004 April EC-185 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS0039U ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. PBIB0081E Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. 2. SEF012P If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Removal and Installation ABS0039V ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . Revision; 2004 April EC-186 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A ABS0039W Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0039X Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* F SPECIFICATION Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0039Y H These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0122 0122 P0123 0123 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Throttle position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Throttle position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 2) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) I J K L FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. M Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision; 2004 April EC-187 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0039Z NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-188 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003A0 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWB0068E Revision; 2004 April EC-189 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR B ITEM Sensors' power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 W/R Sensors' ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 91 R/L G Throttle position sensor 2 Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 2) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure More than 0.36V Approximately 5V ABS003A1 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-190 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB0995E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0082E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal M Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-189 91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-559 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-563, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-191 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-193, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-192 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Component Inspection ABS003A2 A THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1signal), 69 (TP sensor 2signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation EC C D E PBIB1170E F G ABS003A3 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H Refer to EM-16, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-193 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 ABS003A4 NOTE: If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or P0118. Refer to EC-182 . The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. SEF594K Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003A5 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0125 0125 Trouble diagnosis name Insufficient engine coolant temperature for closed loop fuel control Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition ● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine. ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed loop fuel control. EC-194 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (High resistance in the circuit) ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Thermostat 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003A6 A CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F). If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK. If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will be OK. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-195, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F G SEF174Y H WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. I Diagnostic Procedure ABS003A7 1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR J Refer to EC-196, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. K 2. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION L When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant does not flow. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-184, "Wiring Diagram" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-195 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR Component Inspection ABS003A8 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. PBIB0081E Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. 2. SEF012P If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Removal and Installation ABS003A9 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . Revision; 2004 April EC-196 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A ABS003AA The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. EC C D PBIB1604E E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance F kΩ 25 (77) 3.32 1.94 - 2.06 80 (176) 1.23 0.295 - 0.349 G *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. H CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0127 0127 Trouble diagnosis name Intake air temperature too high ABS003AB DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure J Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Intake air temperature sensor K ABS003AC NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. a. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F) Turn ignition switch ON. Revision; 2004 April EC-197 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine. ● Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F). Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-198, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure ABS003AD 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-181, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-179, "Wiring Diagram" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003AE INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06 If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). PBIB1604E SEF012P Revision; 2004 April EC-198 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Removal and Installation ABS003AF A MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-199 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:21200 ABS003AG Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long enough. This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open. DTC No. P0128 0128 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition The engine coolant temperature does not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run long enough. Thermostat function DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Thermostat ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ABS003AH NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher. ● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-24 . Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F). If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step. If it is above 60°C (140°F), stop engine and cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions. VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-200, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure ABS003AI 1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-201, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Revision; 2004 April EC-200 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION Component Inspection ABS003AJ A ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance as shown in the figure. EC C D SEF152P E Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 F G If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. H SEF012P Removal and Installation ABS003AK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I Refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-201 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 Component Description PFP:22690 ABS003AL The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003AM Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003AN To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxygen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high. SEF301UA DTC No. P0132 0132 (Bank 1) P0152 0152 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit high voltage Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-202 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003AO NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-207, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E F SEF174Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. ● Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. Select “MODE 3” with GST. If DTC is detected, go to EC-207, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-203 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 Wiring Diagram ABS003AP BANK 1 TBWT0265E Revision; 2004 April EC-204 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 35 W/B Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C D [Engine is running] 78 A Approximately 0V E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-205 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 BANK 2 TBWT0266E Revision; 2004 April EC-206 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. C 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) D [Engine is running] 78 B/Y A Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E Diagnostic Procedure ABS003AQ 1. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1. G H I PBIB1284E J Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb) K >> GO TO 2. L M Revision; 2004 April EC-207 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. PBIB1285E 3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between HO2S1 and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-208 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 4. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0132 35 1 1 P0152 16 1 2 C Continuity should exist. 2. D Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0132 35 1 1 P0152 16 1 2 F Continuity should not exist. G 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 5. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER I 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L 6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EC-210, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. M 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-209 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 Component Inspection ABS003AR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. SEF646Y 6. Check the following. ● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. SEF647Y SEF648Y CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Revision; 2004 April EC-210 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 Without CONSULT-II A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground. EC 3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. C ● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. ● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time. D ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V E PBIB1107E CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. F ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. G Removal and Installation ABS003AS 1. 2. HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-211 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 Component Description PFP:22690 ABS003AT The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003AU Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003AV To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (heated oxygen sensor 1 cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. SEF010V Revision; 2004 April EC-212 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0133 0133 (Bank 1) P0153 0153 (Bank 2) Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit slow response The response of the voltage signal from the sensor takes more than the specified time. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause A ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV valve ● Mass air flow sensor EC C D ABS003AW CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. 4. 5. F G H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. E Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133” or “HO2S1 (B2) P0153” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. I J K L SEF338Z 6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 20 to 50 seconds.) ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,100 rpm Vehicle speed More than 80 km/h (50 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.5 - 12.0 msec Selector lever Suitable position If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Revision; 2004 April EC-213 SEF339Z 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-218, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF658Y Overall Function Check ABS003AX Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. – Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1(B2) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. 1 time: 2 times: 4. 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V If NG, go to EC-218, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB1107E Revision; 2004 April EC-214 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 Wiring Diagram ABS003AY A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0265E Revision; 2004 April EC-215 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 35 W/B Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) Revision; 2004 April ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-216 Approximately 0V 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0266E Revision; 2004 April EC-217 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V ABS003AZ 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E 2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1. PBIB1284E Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-218 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 3. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. A Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1. EC C D PBIB1165E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. E F 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-219 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? PBIB1077E Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or DTC P0172, P0175 (Refer to EC-257 or EC266 ). No >> GO TO 6. 1. 2. 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-220 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 6. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. EC C D E PBIB1285E 4. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist. G 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. H 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between HO2S1 and ECM J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-221 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 8. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0133 35 1 1 P0153 16 1 2 Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0133 35 1 1 P0153 16 1 2 Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-153, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. 10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-176, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 11. CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to EC-642, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace PCV valve. 12. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EC-223, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. Revision; 2004 April EC-222 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003B0 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. D E F G H SEF646Y 6. Check the following. ● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. I J K SEF647Y L M SEF648Y CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Revision; 2004 April EC-223 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground. 3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. ● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. ● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time. ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V PBIB1107E CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation ABS003B1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision; 2004 April EC-224 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 Component Description PFP:22690 A ABS003B2 The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V. EC C D SEF463R E F G H SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003B3 I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2) ● HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ● SPECIFICATION J Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003B4 Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks that this time is not inordinately long. P0134 0134 (Bank 1) P0154 0154 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit no activity detected Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. 0.3V. EC-225 L M SEF237U DTC No. K 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003B5 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0134” or “HO2S1 (B2) P0154” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Let it idle for at least 3 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4. PBIB0544E 5. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.) ENG SPEED 1,400 - 2,600 rpm Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.0 - 12.0 msec Selector lever Suitable position 6. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-231, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0545E SEC750C Revision; 2004 April EC-226 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 Overall Function Check ABS003B6 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. – 4. A EC Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4V. If NG, go to EC-231, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E F PBIB1107E G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-227 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 Wiring Diagram ABS003B7 BANK 1 TBWT0265E Revision; 2004 April EC-228 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 35 W/B Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C D [Engine is running] 78 A Approximately 0V E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-229 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 BANK 2 TBWT0266E Revision; 2004 April EC-230 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. C 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) D [Engine is running] 78 B/Y A Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E Diagnostic Procedure ABS003B8 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. G >> GO TO 2. H I PBIB0986E J 2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. K L M PBIB1285E 3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-231 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between HO2S1 and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0134 35 1 1 P0154 16 1 2 Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0134 35 1 1 P0154 16 1 2 Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EC-232, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003B9 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. Revision; 2004 April EC-232 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. A EC C SEF646Y D 6. Check the following. ● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. E F G SEF647Y H I J SEF648Y CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II L M 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground. 3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. ● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. ● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time. ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V PBIB1107E CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Revision; 2004 April K EC-233 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation ABS003BA HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision; 2004 April EC-234 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 A ABS003BB The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. EC C D SEF327R E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003BC Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. F SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. G LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003BD The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. H I J K SEF305UA L DTC No. P0138 0138 (Bank 1) P0158 0158 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause M Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit high voltage Revision; 2004 April ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-235 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003BE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-240, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. Select “MODE 3” with GST. If DTC is detected, go to EC-240, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision; 2004 April EC-236 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Wiring Diagram ABS003BF A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0267E Revision; 2004 April EC-237 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 L/B ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) Revision; 2004 April ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-238 Approximately 0V 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0268E Revision; 2004 April EC-239 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 R/Y ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V ABS003BG 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-240 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. EC C D E PBIB1284E 4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist. G 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between HO2S2 and ECM J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-241 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0138 74 1 1 P0158 55 1 2 Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0138 74 1 1 P0158 55 1 2 Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-243, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-242 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Component Inspection ABS003BH A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. EC C D SEF174Y E 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. F G H SEF662Y 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. I J K L PBIB0796E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground. Revision; 2004 April EC-243 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation ABS003BI HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision; 2004 April EC-244 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 A ABS003BJ The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. EC C D SEF327R E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003BK Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. F SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. G LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003BL The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. H I J K SEF302U L DTC No. P0139 0139 (Bank 1) P0159 0159 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit slow response Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition It takes more time for the sensor to respond between rich and lean than the specified time. EC-245 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003BM NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). SEF174Y If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 8. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. PBIB0115E 9. a. b. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-251, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). Return to step 1. Overall Function Check ABS003BN Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground. Revision; 2004 April EC-246 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-251, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C PBIB1607E D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-247 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Wiring Diagram ABS003BO BANK 1 TBWT0267E Revision; 2004 April EC-248 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 L/B A ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) – C 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. D E [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-249 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 BANK 2 TBWT0268E Revision; 2004 April EC-250 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 R/Y A ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) – C D 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. E [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V F ABS003BP 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. H >> GO TO 2. I J PBIB0986E K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-251 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? PBIB1077E Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-257 or EC-266 . No >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-252 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. EC C D E PBIB1284E 4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist. G 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. H 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between HO2S2 and ECM J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-253 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 5. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0139 74 1 1 P0159 55 1 2 Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0139 74 1 1 P0159 55 1 2 Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-254, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003BQ HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. SEF174Y Revision; 2004 April EC-254 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. A EC C SEF662Y 7. D Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. E F G PBIB0796E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. H I J Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Revision; 2004 April EC-255 2003 G35 Coupe K L M DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Removal and Installation ABS003BR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision; 2004 April EC-256 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 A ABS003BS With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The EC ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C Sensor Input signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Heated oxygen sensors 1 DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name P0174 0174 (Bank 2) Fuel injection control DTC detecting condition P0171 0171 (Bank 1) Fuel injection system too lean ECM function ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.) DTC Confirmation Procedure Actuator Fuel injectors D Possible cause E ● Intake air leaks ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Injectors ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Lack of fuel ● Mass air flow sensor ● Incorrect PCV hose connection F G H ABS003BT NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. J Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-261, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-261, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not SEF968Y start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. Revision; 2004 April I EC-257 2003 G35 Coupe K L M DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Select “MODE 3” with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. 6. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. 8. Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-261, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB1077E 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-261, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. Revision; 2004 April EC-258 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION Wiring Diagram ABS003BU A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0269E Revision; 2004 April EC-259 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION BANK 2 TBWT0270E Revision; 2004 April EC-260 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure ABS003BV 1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. A Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1. EC C D E PBIB1165E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. F 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G 1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. 2. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-261 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0171 35 1 1 P0174 16 1 2 Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0171 35 1 1 P0174 16 1 2 Continuity should not exist. 6. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Continuity should exist. 7. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between HO2S1 and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-48, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-262 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-598 .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-49 .) ● Fuel lines ● Fuel filter for clogging EC C >> Repair or replace. 7. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. D With CONSULT-II Install all removed parts. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: E at idling at 2,500 rpm F With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: G H at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-162, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-263 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 8. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. PBIB1725E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-592, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . 9. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-34, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. For DTC P0171, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 1. For DTC P0174, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors on bank 1. For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors on bank 2. Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. Revision; 2004 April EC-264 PBIB1726E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-265 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 ABS003BW With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). Sensor Input signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Heated oxygen sensors 1 DTC No. P0172 0172 (Bank 1) P0175 0175 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Fuel injection system too rich ECM function Fuel injection control DTC detecting condition Actuator Fuel injectors Possible cause ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 Injectors ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Mass air flow sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003BX NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-270, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-270, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine SEF968Y does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. Revision; 2004 April EC-266 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION WITH GST A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then EC restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. C 5. Select “MODE 3” with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. 6. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. D 8. Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-270, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB1077E E 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-270, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake F air leak visually. 1. 2. 3. G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-267 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION Wiring Diagram ABS003BY BANK 1 TBWT0269E Revision; 2004 April EC-268 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0270E Revision; 2004 April EC-269 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure ABS003BZ 1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1. PBIB1165E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision; 2004 April EC-270 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC C Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0172 35 1 1 P0175 16 1 2 D Continuity should exist. 5. E Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC F Bank ECM Sensor P0172 35 1 1 P0175 16 1 2 G H Continuity should not exist. 6. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. I Continuity should exist. 7. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. J 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between HO2S1 and ECM L >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-48, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-271 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-598 .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-49 .) >> Repair or replace. 7. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-162, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . Revision; 2004 April EC-272 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 8. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. F Clicking noise should be heard. G H I PBIB1725E J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-592, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . K 9. CHECK INJECTOR Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-34, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. 4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors. 6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 10. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. 1. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-273 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 ABS003C0 The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. PBIB1280E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0181 0181 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit range/ performance ABS003C1 DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor and intake air temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ABS003C2 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. If the result is NG, go to EC-277, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the result is OK, go to following step. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F). Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-277, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision; 2004 April EC-274 SEF174Y 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-275 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003C3 TBWT0271E Revision; 2004 April EC-276 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ABS003C4 1. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB1280E 4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H PBIB0932E I 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” J K >> Repair harness or connector. 3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and body ground. >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. Revision; 2004 April EC-277 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR 5. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-278, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003C5 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Remove fuel level sensor unit. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 PBIB0931E Removal and Installation ABS003C6 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision; 2004 April EC-278 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A ABS003C7 The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. EC C D PBIB1280E E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 F G *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. H CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name ABS003C8 DTC detecting condition J Possible cause P0182 0182 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0183 0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Fuel tank temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003C9 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-281, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-279 2003 G35 Coupe K L M DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003CA TBWT0271E Revision; 2004 April EC-280 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ABS003CB 1. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB1280E 4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H PBIB0932E I 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” J K >> Repair harness or connector. 3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and body ground. >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. Revision; 2004 April EC-281 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR 5. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-278, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003CC FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Remove fuel level sensor unit. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 PBIB0931E Removal and Installation ABS003CD FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision; 2004 April EC-282 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A ABS003CE Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003CF Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* F SPECIFICATION Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003CG H These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0222 0222 P0223 0223 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Throttle position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Throttle position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) I J K L FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode an the MIL lights up. M Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision; 2004 April EC-283 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003CH NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-286, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-284 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003CI A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWB0067E Revision; 2004 April EC-285 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR B ITEM Sensors' power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 W/R Sensors' ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 91 R/L G Throttle position sensor 2 Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 2) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure More than 0.36V Approximately 5V ABS003CJ 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-286 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB0995E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0082E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal M Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-285 91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-559 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-563, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-287 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-289, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-288 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Component Inspection ABS003CK A THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1signal), 69 (TP sensor 2signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation EC C D E PBIB1170E F G ABS003CL ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H Refer to EM-16, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-289 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE PFP:00000 On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003CM When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring. Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Engine speed ECM function On board diagnosis of misfire The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. 1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink. When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again. 2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders. DTC No. P0300 0300 P0301 0301 Trouble diagnosis name Multiple cylinder misfire detected No.1 cylinder misfire detected DTC detecting condition Multiple cylinder misfire. No. 1 cylinder misfires. P0302 0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected P0303 0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires. P0304 0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. P0305 0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire detected No. 5 cylinder misfires. P0306 0306 No. 6 cylinder misfire detected No. 6 cylinder misfires. No. 2 cylinder misfires. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Improper spark plug ● Insufficient compression ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● The injector circuit is open or shorted ● Fuel injectors ● Intake air leak ● The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted ● Lack of fuel ● Signal plate ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Incorrect PCV hose connection ABS003CN CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. Revision; 2004 April EC-290 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE WITH CONSULT-II A Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-291, "Diagnostic Procedure" C . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing D the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain E time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. 1. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (5 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition F G When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). H When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). I The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data. Engine speed Time J Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L Diagnostic Procedure ABS003CO 1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE M 1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. 2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. 3. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace it. Revision; 2004 April EC-291 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE 3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? PBIB0997E Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 7. 4. CHECK INJECTOR Does each injector make an operating sound at idle? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-592, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . PBIB1725E Revision; 2004 April EC-292 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE 5. CHECK IGNITION SPARK A 1. Remove ignition coil assembly from rocker cover. 2. Remove spark plug from ignition coil assembly 3. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil. 4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine. 5. Check for spark. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-580, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . EC C D E SEF575Q F 6. CHECK SPARK PLUGS Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to, MA-16, "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)" . G H I SEF156I J 7. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE K Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-81, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" . Standard: 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2 , 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum: 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2 , 142 psi)/300 rpm Difference between each cylinder: 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/300 rpm L M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. 8. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. Install all removed parts. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-48, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. Revision; 2004 April EC-293 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-598, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) ● Fuel lines ● Fuel filter for clogging >> Repair or replace. 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING Check the following items. Refer to EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . Items Target idle speed Ignition timing Specifications A/T 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) A/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Follow the EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . 11. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) Refer to EC-210, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12. 12. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm With GST Check mass air flow sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-162, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . 13. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-86, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision; 2004 April EC-294 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE 14. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC A Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . EC >> GO TO 15. C 15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-295 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0327, P0328 KS DTC P0327, P0328 KS Component Description PFP:22060 ABS003CP The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. PBIB0998E On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003CQ The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected condition P0327 0327 Knock sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0328 0328 Knock sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Knock sensor DTC No. Possible cause DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003CR NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-298, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-296 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0327, P0328 KS Wiring Diagram ABS003CS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0278E Revision; 2004 April EC-297 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0327, P0328 KS Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 15 WIRE COLOR W ITEM Knock sensor CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.5V Diagnostic Procedure ABS003CT 1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0998E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F37, F229 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EC-299, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace knock sensor. Revision; 2004 April EC-298 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0327, P0328 KS 5. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS A Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. EC >> GO TO 6. C D PBIB0986E 6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. H 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness connectors F37, F229 ● Harness connectors F102, M72 ● Harness for open or short between knock sensor terminal 2 and body ground I J K >> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END M Component Inspection ABS003CU KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. SEF111Y Revision; 2004 April EC-299 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0327, P0328 KS Removal and Installation ABS003CV KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EM-98, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . Revision; 2004 April EC-300 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description PFP:23731 A ABS003CW The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. EC C D PBIB0562E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003CX Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ENG SPEED· F SPECIFICATION Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II value. Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0335 0335 Trouble diagnosis name Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit ABS003CY Possible cause H ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) I ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Signal plate DTC detecting condition ● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of engine cranking. ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is running. ● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. J K DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003CZ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-303, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April G EC-301 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Wiring Diagram ABS003D0 TBWT0279E Revision; 2004 April EC-302 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 1.2V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D E 13 BR PBIB1041E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Approximately 1.1V F [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G PBIB1042E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure ABS003D1 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS I 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. K L PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-303 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) 2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1279E 3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0664E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E12, F3 ● Joint connector-3 ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F102, M72 ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground ● >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-304 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) 6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) E Refer to EC-306, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). F 8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH G Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace the signal plate. H 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J >> INSPECTION END K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-305 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Inspection ABS003D2 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 3 (-) PBIB0564E Removal and Installation ABS003D3 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EM-26, "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER" . Revision; 2004 April EC-306 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description PFP:23731 A ABS003D4 The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. EC C D PBIB0562E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00957 F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ENG SPEED· SPECIFICATION Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II value. Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. On Board Diagnosis Logic G ABS003D5 H DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name P0340 0340 (Bank 1) P0345 0345 (Bank 2) DTC detecting condition ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the first few seconds during engine cranking. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM during engine running. ● Camshaft (Intake) ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-10 .) ● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-10 .) ● Dead (Weak) battery J K DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003D6 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-311, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-311, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF013Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April I EC-307 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Wiring Diagram ABS003D7 BANK 1 TBWT0280E Revision; 2004 April EC-308 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D E 33 OR PBIB1039E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 1) 1.0 - 4.0V F [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G PBIB1040E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-309 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) BANK 2 TBWT0281E Revision; 2004 April EC-310 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D E 14 Y PBIB1039E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) 1.0 - 4.0V F [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G PBIB1040E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure ABS003D8 I 1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Turn ignition switch to START position. J Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .) K 2. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS L 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. M >> GO TO 3. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-311 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) 3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. PBIB1000E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. SEF481Y 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E12, F3 ● Joint connector-3 ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-312 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors F102, M72 ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and engine ground EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. D Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 or 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F G 8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) H Refer to EC-314, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). I 9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) J Check the following. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end ● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. K L M SEC905C 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-313 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Inspection ABS003D9 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 3 (-) PBIB0564E Removal and Installation ABS003DA CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EM-66, "CAMSHAFT" . Revision; 2004 April EC-314 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:20905 A ABS003DB The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2. EC C D PBIB1166E A three way catalyst 1 with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will increase. When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst 1 malfunction is diagnosed. E F G DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name P0420 0420 (Bank 1) P0430 0430 (Bank 2) DTC detecting condition ● Catalyst system efficiency below threshold ● Three way catalyst 1 does not operate properly. Three way catalyst 1 does not have enough oxygen storage capacity. Possible cause ● Three way catalyst 1 ● Exhaust tube ● Intake air leaks ● Fuel injectors ● Fuel injector leaks ● Spark plug ● Improper ignition timing DTC Confirmation Procedure H I J ABS003DC NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II L TESTING CONDITION: Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. Revision; 2004 April K EC-315 M SEF189Y 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION 8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely. If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12. 10. Wait 5 seconds at idle. SEF940Z 11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take approximately 5 minutes). If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1. SEF941Z 12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. 13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-317, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF535Z Overall Function Check ABS003DD Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst 1. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. Open engine hood. Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 35 [HO2S1 (bank 1) signal], 16 [HO2S1 (bank 2) signal] and engine ground, and ECM terminals 74 [HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and engine ground. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. PBIB1107E Revision; 2004 April EC-316 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION 7. Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low) between ECM terminals 74 and engine ground, or 55 and A engine ground is very less than that of ECM terminals 35 and engine ground, or 16 and engine ground. Switching frequency ratio = A/B EC A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 voltage switching frequency B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 voltage switching frequency This ratio should be less than 0.75. If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst 1 C does not operate properly. Go to EC-317, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB1108E NOTE: D If the voltage at terminal 35 or 16 does not switch periodically more than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 7, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0133, P0153 first. (See EC-212 .) Diagnostic Procedure ABS003DE E 1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. F G 2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. H Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst 1. I J K PBIB1165E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. M 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision; 2004 April L EC-317 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION 4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING Check the following items. Refer to EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . Items Target idle speed Ignition timing Specifications A/T 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T 650 ± 50 rpm (in N position) A/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . 5. CHECK INJECTORS 1. 2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-593 . Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform EC-595, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB1172E 6. CHECK IGNITION SPARK 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover. 3. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly. 4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine. 5. Check for spark. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit. Refer to EC-580, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . SEF575Q Revision; 2004 April EC-318 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION 7. CHECK INJECTOR A 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-34, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. EC C D 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly. G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-319 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM System Description PFP:14950 ABS003DF NOTE: If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform trouble diagnosis for other DTC. PBIB1026E In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003DG Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined. DTC No. P0441 0441 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system incorrect purge flow DTC detecting condition EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck closed ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube ● Blocked rubber tube ● Cracked EVAP canister ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit ● Accelerator pedal position sensor ● Blocked purge port ● EVAP canister vent control valve ABS003DH CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. Revision; 2004 April EC-320 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. EC Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. C If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.) D Selector lever Suitable position Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm E B/FUEL SCHDL 1.3 - 9.0 msec Engine coolant temperature 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) F G H I PBIB0826E 7. If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC322, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check ABS003DI J K Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. L Lift up drive wheels. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed and note it. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Air conditioner switch M ON Headlamp switch ON Rear window defogger switch ON Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm Gear position Any position other than P, N or R PBIB1109E 8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second. Revision; 2004 April EC-321 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 9. If NG, go to EC-322, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure ABS003DJ 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check EVAP canister for cracks. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister. 2. CHECK PURGE FLOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . Start engine and let it idle. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence. PURG VOL CONT/V 100% Vacuum Should exist. 0% Should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0147E 3. CHECK PURGE FLOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. 6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle. Vacuum should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision; 2004 April EC-322 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE A 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair it. EC C 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT 1. 2. D Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B . Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C . E F G SEF367U 3. Check that air flows freely. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port. H I J SEF368U K 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE L With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. M PBIB0147E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-340, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Revision; 2004 April EC-323 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-353 , P0453 EC-359 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace it. 13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-324 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 A ABS003DK This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister EC purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions. The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold C vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed. D E F G H PBIB1026E I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-325 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC No. P0442 0442 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system small leak detected (negative pressure) DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly. Possible cause ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003DL NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. ● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision; 2004 April EC-326 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM Follow the instruction displayed. A EC C PBIB0829E NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-328, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. D E F G H SEC763C WITH GST I NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-61 before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-61 . 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Select “MODE 1” with GST. ● If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. ● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine. It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving. 7. Drive vehicle again according to the Driving Pattern, EC-61 . 8. Stop vehicle. 9. Select “MODE 3” with GST. ● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-328, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-322 . ● If P0441 and P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step. 10. Select “MODE 1” with GST. ● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. ● If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-327 2003 G35 Coupe J K L M DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM Diagnostic Procedure ABS003DM 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-633, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. Revision; 2004 April EC-328 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP A To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . EC C D PBIB1001E E F G SEF916U NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-329 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U Revision; 2004 April EC-330 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. A Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. EC Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) C D E PBIB1086E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. F G ● H I J SEF200U K 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE L Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-634, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. Revision; 2004 April EC-331 M 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. PBIB1031E 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.2 kg (4.9 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection ● >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 1. 2. 3. 4. PBIB0147E Revision; 2004 April EC-332 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. A EC C Vacuum should exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. E 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. F G 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H Refer to EC-340, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. I 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR J Refer to EC-278, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. K 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L Refer to EC-357, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. M 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. Revision; 2004 April EC-333 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-637, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 21. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-640, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to DI-22, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-334 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description A ABS003DN SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed *1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Heated oxygen sensors 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank 2 ECM function Actuator C D EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve E F Vehicle speed Vehicle speed signal* *1:ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. G This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. H I COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. J K L SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003DO Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load PURG VOL C/V Revision; 2004 April SPECIFICATION Idle 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-335 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0444 0444 P0445 0445 ABS003DP Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit open EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit shorted DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003DQ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-339, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-336 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram ABS003DR A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0282E Revision; 2004 April EC-337 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● 45 L/W Idle speed SEC990C EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine). SEC991C [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 P L Power supply for ECM A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision; 2004 April EC-338 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ABS003DS 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A CUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D E PBIB1001E 4. F Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. H PBIB0148E I 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E12, F3 ● Joint connector-3 ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM J K L >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-339 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 1. 2. 3. PBIB0147E 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-340, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003DT EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No PBIB0149E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No PBIB0150E Revision; 2004 April EC-340 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Removal and Installation ABS003DU A EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-16, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-341 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 ABS003DV The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System” diagnosis. PBIB1263E PBIB1086E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003DW Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0447 0447 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open Revision; 2004 April ABS003DX DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve. EC-342 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003DY A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-345, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y G WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-343 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Wiring Diagram ABS003DZ TBWT0283E Revision; 2004 April EC-344 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W A ECM relay (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 117 GY/L EVAP canister vent control valve 119 120 P L Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF DATA (DC Voltage) C 0 - 1.5V D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure F ABS003E0 1. INSPECTION START G Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. H I 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON. 2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen. 4. Check for operating sound of the valve. Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. J K L M PBIB0151E Revision; 2004 April EC-345 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector. PBIB1086E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0152E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E123, B41 ● Joint connector-2 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-346 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING D 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. E F 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. G H 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . I >> INSPECTION END J Component Inspection ABS003E1 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. K Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. L M PBIB1033E Revision; 2004 April EC-347 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. 7. 8. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 6 again. PBIB0151E Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. PBIB1033E 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. 5. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. Revision; 2004 April EC-348 PBIB1034E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:22365 A ABS004W2 The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. EC C D E PBIB1086E F G H PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS004W3 J Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic K ABS004W4 NOTE: If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-490 . DTC No. P0451 0451 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition EVAP control system pressure sensor performance ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP control system pressure sensor Revision; 2004 April I EC-349 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors ● EVAP control system pressure sensor 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS004W5 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds. NOTE: Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF194Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure ABS004W6 1. CHECK EVPA CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. PBIB1086E Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. 2. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-351, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram, refer to EC-354 . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-350 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Inspection ABS004W7 A EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value EC C D CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. E PBIB1173E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-351 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 ABS003E2 The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. PBIB1086E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003E3 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003E4 NOTE: If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-490 . DTC No. P0452 0452 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor low input Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-352 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003E5 A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-355, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F G SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select “MODE 7” with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-355, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K PBIB1110E L M Revision; 2004 April EC-353 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003E6 TBWT0284E Revision; 2004 April EC-354 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 P EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 B/Y Sensors' power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V B/W Sensors' ground (Mass air flow sensor / IAT sensor / Power steering pressure sensor / EVAP control system pressure sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 67 A C D [Engine is running] E Approximately 0V F Diagnostic Procedure ABS003E7 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. H >> GO TO 2. I J PBIB0986E 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. K Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. L M PBIB1086E 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. Revision; 2004 April EC-355 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0138E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Joint connector-3 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-356 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. EC Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. C 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. D 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR H Refer to EC-357, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. I 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003E8 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. L Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Revision; 2004 April EC-357 M PBIB1173E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 ABS003E9 The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. PBIB1086E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003EA Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003EB NOTE: If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-490 . DTC No. P0453 0453 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor high input Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-358 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control valve to vehicle frame 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003EC A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-361, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F G SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select “MODE 7” with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-361, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K PBIB1110E L M Revision; 2004 April EC-359 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003ED TBWT0284E Revision; 2004 April EC-360 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 P EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 B/Y Sensors' power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V B/W Sensors' ground (Mass air flow sensor / IAT sensor / Power steering pressure sensor / EVAP control system pressure sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 67 A C D [Engine is running] E Approximately 0V F Diagnostic Procedure ABS003EE 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. H >> GO TO 2. I J PBIB0986E 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. K Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. L M PBIB1086E 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. Revision; 2004 April EC-361 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0138E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Joint connector-3 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-362 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. EC Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. C 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. D 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M12 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING H 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. I J 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. K L 11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-365, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. M 12. CHECK RUBBER TUBE Check obstructed rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube. Revision; 2004 April EC-363 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 13. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> GO TO 16. PBIB1031E 14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.2 kg (4.9 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. 15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-364 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Inspection ABS003EF A EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value EC C D CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. E PBIB1173E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-365 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 ABS003EG This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. PBIB1026E DTC No. P0455 0455 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system gross leak detected Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a very large leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not operate properly. EC-366 Possible cause ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. ● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. EC DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003EH CAUTION: Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. NOTE: ● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. ● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures. C D E F WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. G H I J K L M PBIB0829E 7. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-368, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442 EC-328, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEC763C Revision; 2004 April EC-367 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-61 before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to EC-61, "Driving Pattern" . 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Select “MODE 1” with GST. ● If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. ● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine. It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving. 7. Drive vehicle again according to the EC-61, "Driving Pattern" . 8. Stop vehicle. 9. Select “MODE 3” with GST. ● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-368, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442, EC-328 . ● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-322 . ● If P0455, P0441, P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step. 10. Select “MODE 1” with GST. ● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. ● If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6. Diagnostic Procedure ABS003EI 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision; 2004 April EC-368 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A Refer to EC-633, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE EC C Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. D E 6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE F Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 7. G 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE H Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-634, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-369 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. PBIB1001E SEF916U Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10. 9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U Revision; 2004 April EC-370 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. A Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. EC Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) C D E PBIB1086E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace. F G ● H I J SEF200U K 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. PBIB0828E Revision; 2004 April EC-371 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. 13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. PBIB0828E 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-340, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-278, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. Revision; 2004 April EC-372 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR A Refer to EC-357, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC 18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE C Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-637, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. D E 19. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. 20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE F G H Refer to EC-640, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. I 21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision; 2004 April EC-373 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 ABS003EJ This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak diagnosis. If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected. If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected. If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK. PBIB1026E Revision; 2004 April EC-374 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC No. P0456 0456 Trouble diagnosis name Evaporative emission control system very small leak (negative pressure check) DTC detecting condition ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● EVAP system does not operate properly. Possible cause A ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC D F H I J K L ABS003EK NOTE: ● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456. ● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. ● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. – Fuel filler cap is removed. – Refilled or drained the fuel. – EVAP component parts is/are removed. ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. Revision; 2004 April E G CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. DTC Confirmation Procedure C EC-375 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure the following conditions are met. FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F) INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1). Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. PBIB0837E 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-377, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: ● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . ● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. Overall Function Check ABS003EL WITH GST Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system. ● Do not start engine. ● 1. Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi). Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. PBIB1001E Revision; 2004 April EC-376 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set the pressure pump and a hose. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose. Turn ignition switch ON. Connect GST and select “MODE 8”. Using “MODE 8” control the EVAP canister vent control valve (close). Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied. Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg) Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg). If NG, go to EC-377, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to next step. Disconnect GST. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF. NOTE: For more information, refer to GST instruction manual. A EC C SEF462UI D E F G H Diagnostic Procedure ABS003EM 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN I 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. J K L SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION M Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision; 2004 April EC-377 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-633, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . PBIB1001E SEF916U NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. Revision; 2004 April EC-378 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. 3. A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● EC C Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. D E PEF917U F 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. G H SEF200U I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-379 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) PBIB1086E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. ● SEF200U 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-634, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. Revision; 2004 April EC-380 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. EC 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. C No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. 1. D PBIB1031E E 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.2 kg (4.9 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. F G H 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. K 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 1. 2. 3. 4. PBIB0147E Revision; 2004 April EC-381 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-340, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-278, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-357, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. Revision; 2004 April EC-382 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-637, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. C CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE 21. Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. D E 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE F Refer to EC-640, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. G 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H Refer to DI-22, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. I 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision; 2004 April EC-383 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 ABS003EN The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. PBIB1100E On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003EO NOTE: If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-140 . When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected. DTC No. P0460 0460 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit noise DTC detecting condition Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor ABS003EP NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-385, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-384 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ABS003EQ 1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION A Refer to DI-13, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-13, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" . EC C 2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT Refer to DI-17, "Inspection/Fuel Level Sensor" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. D E 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F >> INSPECTION END G Removal and Installation ABS003ER FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-385 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 ABS003ES The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. PBIB1100E On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003ET NOTE: If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-140 . Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level. This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has been driven. DTC No. P0461 0461 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit range/performance DTC detecting condition The output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change within the specified range even though the vehicle has been driven a long distance. Overall Function Check Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor ABS003EU Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-11, "FUEL TANK" . TESTING CONDITION: Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required. WITH CONSULT-II NOTE: Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-48, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON. 6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision; 2004 April EC-386 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 7. 8. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULTII. 9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 65/8 Imp gal) and stop it. 10. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 11. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. 12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 11. If NG, go to EC-387, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF195Y D WITH GST NOTE: Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-48, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. 6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. 7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 10. If NG, go to EC-387, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure E F G H I ABS003EV 1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION J Refer to DI-13, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-13, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" . K 2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT L Refer to DI-17, "Inspection/Fuel Level Sensor" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. M 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation ABS003EW FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision; 2004 April EC-387 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 ABS003EX The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. PBIB1100E On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003EY NOTE: If DTC P0462 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-140 . This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction. DTC No. P0462 0462 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit low input DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor ABS003EZ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch ON. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-389, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-388 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ABS003F0 1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION A Refer to DI-13, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-13, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" . EC C 2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT Refer to DI-17, "Inspection/Fuel Level Sensor" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. D E 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F >> INSPECTION END G Removal and Installation ABS003F1 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-389 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0500 VSS DTC P0500 VSS Description PFP:32702 ABS003F2 NOTE: If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-140, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the VDC/TCS/ABS control unit by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends the signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0500 0500 Trouble diagnosis name Vehicle speed sensor ABS003F3 DTC detecting condition The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted) ● Wheel sensor ● Combination meter ● VDC/TCS/ABS control unit ABS003F4 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULTII should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-391, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,600 - 6,000 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL 5.3 - 31.8 (A/T) msec 5.0 - 31.8 (M/T) msec Selector lever Except P or N position (A/T) Except Neutral position (M/T) PW/ST SIGNAL OFF SEF196Y 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-391, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision; 2004 April EC-390 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0500 VSS Overall Function Check ABS003F5 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. A EC Lift up drive wheels. Start engine. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST. The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-391, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure C D ABS003F6 1. CHECK DTC WITH VDC/TCS ABS CONTROL UNIT E Refer to BRC-15, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. F 2. COMBINATION METER G Check combination meter function. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . H >> INSPECTION END I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-391 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 ABS003F7 NOTE: If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0506 0506 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM lower than expected ABS003F8 DTC detecting condition The idle speed is less than the target idle speed by 100 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak ABS003F9 NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-46 , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service Data and Specifications (SDS), EC-646 . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-393, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-392 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM Diagnostic Procedure ABS003FA 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK A 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. EC C 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-124, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" . Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . D E F G >> INSPECTION END H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-393 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 ABS003FB NOTE: If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0507 0507 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM higher than expected ABS003FC DTC detecting condition The idle speed is more than the target idle speed by 200 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak ● PCV system ABS003FD NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-46 , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service Data and Specifications (SDS), EC-646 . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-395, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-394 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM Diagnostic Procedure ABS003FE 1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION A Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. EC C 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. D E 3. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-124, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" . Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . G H I >> INSPECTION END J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-395 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Component Description PFP:49763 ABS003FF Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. PBIB1281E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003FG Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PW/ST SIGNAL CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION Steering wheel is in neutral position. (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel is turned. ON On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003FH The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-490 . DTC No. P0550 0550 Trouble diagnosis name Power steering pressure sensor circuit DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Power steering pressure sensor An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003FI NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-398, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-396 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003FJ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0285E Revision; 2004 April EC-397 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 12 L/W Power steering pressure sensor ● [Engine is running] ● 67 68 B/W Y Sensors' ground (Mass air flow sensor / IAT sensor / Power steering pressure sensor) Sensors' power supply (Power steering pressure sensor / EVAP control system pressure sensor) Steering wheel is being turned. Steering wheel is not being turned. DATA (DC Voltage) 0.5 - 4.5V 0.4 - 0.8V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V Approximately 5V ABS003FK 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-398 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR 2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB1281E 3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G PBIB0188E H 3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. K 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. L 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Joint connector-3 ● Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-399 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR 6. CHECK PSP SENSOR Refer to EC-400, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace PSP sensor. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003FL POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and let it idle. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the following conditions. Condition Voltage Steering wheel is being turned. 0.5 - 4.5V Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V MBIB0126E Revision; 2004 April EC-400 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0605 ECM DTC P0605 ECM Component Description PFP:23710 A ABS003FM The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC C D PBIB1164E E On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003FN This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic. DTC No. P0605 0605 Trouble diagnosis name Engine control module DTC detecting condition A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. F Possible cause ● ECM G FAIL-SAFE MODE H ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected. Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. ● ECM deactivates ASCD operation. Malfunction A J DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003FO Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. K L M Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-402, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April I EC-401 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0605 ECM PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-402, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Repeat step 3 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-402, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure ABS003FP 1. INSPECTION START With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-401 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MODE 4” with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-401 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. Revision; 2004 April EC-402 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0605 ECM 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-124, "ECM EC Re-Communicating Function" . Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . C Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-403 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description PFP:23710 ABS003FQ Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. PBIB1164E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1065 1065 Trouble diagnosis name ECM power supply circuit ABS003FR DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is open or shorted.] ● ECM ECM back-up RAM system does not function properly. DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003FS NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-406, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-404 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Wiring Diagram ABS003FT A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0286E Revision; 2004 April EC-405 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 121 WIRE COLOR R/W ITEM Power supply for ECM (Back-up) CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ABS003FU 1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. MBIB0026E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E11, F2 ● Joint connector-3 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-406 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY 4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-404 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. EC C With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MODE 4” with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-404 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> INSPECTION END D 1. 2. 3. 4. E F G 5. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-124, "ECM Re-Communicating Function" . Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H I J >> INSPECTION END K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-407 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description PFP:23796 ABS003FV Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. PBIB0195E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003FW Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 0% - 2% When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0% - 50% On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1111 1111 (Bank 1) P1136 1136 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit ABS003FX DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve An improper voltage is sent to the ECM through intake valve timing control solenoid valve. DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003FY NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-412, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-408 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram ABS003FZ A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0256E Revision; 2004 April EC-409 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 7 - 12V 11 R/W Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm quickly PBIB1790E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision; 2004 April EC-410 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0257E Revision; 2004 April EC-411 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 7 - 12V 10 W/G Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm quickly PBIB1790E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure ABS003G0 1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. PBIB0988E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0192E Revision; 2004 April EC-412 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E12, F3 ● Harness connectors F18, F201 ● Joint connector-2 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E8 ● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R >> Repair harness or connectors. EC C D 3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 (bank 1) or 10 (bank 2) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. F G 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. H 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors F18, F201 ● Harness for open and short between ECM and intake valve timing control solenoid valve J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K 5. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-414, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. L M 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-413 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Inspection ABS003G1 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows. Terminals Resistance 1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω at 20°C (68°F) 1 or 2 and ground ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) PBIB0193E Removal and Installation ABS003G2 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-50, "TIMING CHAIN" . Revision; 2004 April EC-414 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Component Description PFP:16119 A ABS003G3 Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening C angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003G4 D These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1121 1121 Trouble diagnosis name Electric throttle control actuator DTC detecting condition A) Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction. B) Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range. C) ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open. Possible cause E ● Electric throttle control actuator F G FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items H Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Malfunction A ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. Malfunction C While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. I J DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003G5 NOTE: ● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K L PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 2 seconds. 4. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T). 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 7. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 2 seconds. 8. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T). 9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. 10. If DTC is detected, go to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M 1. 2. 3. SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-415 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 2 seconds. Shift selector lever to N, P position (A/T) or Neutral (M/T) position. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure ABS003G6 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. PBIB1015E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-416 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Description PFP:16119 A ABS003G7 NOTE: If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or EC P1126. Refer to EC-415 or EC-423 . Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- C back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. D On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003G8 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P1122 1122 Electric throttle control performance problem E Possible cause Electric throttle control function does not operate properly. ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted) F Electric throttle control actuator G FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode H ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003G9 I NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-419, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-417 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Wiring Diagram ABS003GA TBWT0287E Revision; 2004 April EC-418 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C W/R Throttle control motor relay power supply [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 14V D [Ignition switch: ON] 4 BR Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is releasing E PBIB1104E F 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 G Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is depressing G H PBIB1105E 104 G/W Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Diagnostic Procedure I ABS003GB J 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. K L >> GO TO 2. M PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-419 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E12, F3 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB1171E Revision; 2004 April EC-420 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION 6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 40. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. D 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors E11, F2 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 8. CHECK FUSE H 1. Disconnect 15A fuse. 2. Check 15A fuse for blown. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. I 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. K L 10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 6 ECM terminal M Continuity 5 Should not exist 4 Should exist 5 Should exist 4 Should not exist PBIB0995E 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision; 2004 April EC-421 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION 11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. PBIB1015E 12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-422, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 14. 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 14. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003GC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . PBIB0095E Remove and Installation ABS003GD ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-16, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . Revision; 2004 April EC-422 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description PFP:16119 A ABS003GE Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends EC an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. C CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003GF Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL RELAY CONDITION ● D SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON ON On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003GG E These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1124 1124 P1126 1126 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor relay circuit short Throttle control motor relay circuit open DTC detecting condition F Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted) ● Throttle control motor relay ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open) ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is stuck ON. ECM detects a voltage of power source for throttle control motor is excessively low. ● G H Throttle control motor relay I FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. J Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTC is detected, go to EC-426, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y Revision; 2004 April K ABS003GH EC-423 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR””mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-426, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-424 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Wiring Diagram ABS003GI A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0288E Revision; 2004 April EC-425 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM 3 W/R Throttle control motor relay power supply 104 G/W Throttle control motor relay CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Diagnostic Procedure ABS003GJ 1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB1171E 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 40. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E11, F2 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-426 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY 4. CHECK FUSE A 1. Disconnect 15A fuse. 2. Check 15A fuse for blown. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. EC C 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) D E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. MBIB0028E G 6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. J 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. K 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L Check the following. ● Harness connectors E12, F3 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-427 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Component Description PFP:16119 ABS003GK The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003GL This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1128 1128 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor circuit short DTC detecting condition ECM detects short in both circuits between ECM and throttle control motor. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (Throttle control motor) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003GM NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-430, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-428 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Wiring Diagram ABS003GN A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0289E Revision; 2004 April EC-429 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 BR Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is releasing PBIB1104E 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 G Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is depressing PBIB1105E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure ABS003GO 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-430 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC C Electric throttle control actuator terminal ECM terminal 3 6 Continuity 5 Should not exist 4 Should exist 5 Should exist 4 Should not exist D PBIB0995E E 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. F 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR G Refer to EC-431, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. H I 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. J K 5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . L M >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003GP THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . PBIB0095E Revision; 2004 April EC-431 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Removal and Installation ABS003GQ ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-16, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . Revision; 2004 April EC-432 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 Component Description PFP:22690 A ABS003GR The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V. EC C D SEF463R E F G H SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003GS I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2) ● HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ● SPECIFICATION J Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003GT To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected. P1143 1143 (Bank 1) P1163 1163 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 lean shift monitoring Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition The maximum and minimum voltage from the sensor are not reached to the specified voltages. EC-433 L M SEF300U DTC No. K Possible cause ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003GU CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). ● Before performing following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1143” of “HO2S1” or “HO2S1 (B2) P1163” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. PBIB0546E 6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 40 seconds or more.) ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,600 rpm Vehicle speed Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.5 - 12.0 msec Selector lever Suitable position 7. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-435, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0547E SEC769C Revision; 2004 April EC-434 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 Overall Function Check ABS003GV Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. – – 4. A EC Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1(B2) signal] and engine ground. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time. If NG, go to EC-435, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E F PBIB1107E Diagnostic Procedure ABS003GW G 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. H >> GO TO 2. I J K PBIB0986E 2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 L Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1. M PBIB1284E Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-435 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-257 . No >> GO TO 4. 1. 2. 3. PBIB1077E 4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-153, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EC-437, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For circuit, refer to EC-204, "Wiring Diagram" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-436 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 Component Inspection ABS003GX A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT- EC II. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”. C Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. D E F SEF646Y 6. G Check the following. ● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. H I SEF647Y J K L M SEF648Y CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Revision; 2004 April EC-437 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. ● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. ● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time. ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V PBIB1107E CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation ABS003GY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision; 2004 April EC-438 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 Component Description PFP:22690 A ABS003GZ The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V. EC C D SEF463R E F G H SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003H0 I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2) ● HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ● SPECIFICATION J Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003H1 To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently high, and “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected. P1144 1144 (Bank 1) P1164 1164 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 rich shift monitoring Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition The maximum and minimum voltages from the sensor are beyond the specified voltages. EC-439 L M SEF299U DTC No. K Possible cause ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003H2 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1144” or “HO2S1 (B2) P1164” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. PBIB0548E 6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 40 seconds or more.) ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,600 rpm Vehicle speed Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.5 - 12.0 msec Selector lever Suitable position 7. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0549E SEC772C Revision; 2004 April EC-440 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 Overall Function Check ABS003H3 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. – – 4. A EC Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] 16 [HO2S1(B2) signal] and engine ground. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time. The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time. If NG, go to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E F PBIB1107E Diagnostic Procedure ABS003H4 G 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. H >> GO TO 2. I J K PBIB0986E 2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 L Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1. M PBIB1284E Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-441 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-266 . No >> GO TO 4. 1. 2. 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-442 PBIB1077E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. EC C D PBIB1285E 3. E Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. G 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER H Refer to EC-153, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. I 6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 J Refer to EC-443, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. K 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For circuit, refer to EC-204, "Wiring Diagram" . M >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003H5 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. Revision; 2004 April EC-443 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. SEF646Y 6. Check the following. ● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. SEF647Y SEF648Y CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. ● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. ● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time. ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V PBIB1107E CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Revision; 2004 April EC-444 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation A ABS003H6 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 EC Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-445 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 ABS003H7 The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003H8 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003H9 The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. SEF972Z DTC No. P1146 1146 (Bank 1) P1166 1166 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 minimum voltage monitoring Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-446 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003HA NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). SEF174Y If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F G H I J K PBIB0818E 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-452, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M ABS003HB Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground. Revision; 2004 April EC-447 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 4th gear (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-452, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision; 2004 April EC-448 PBIB1607E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 Wiring Diagram ABS003HC A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0267E Revision; 2004 April EC-449 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 L/B ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) Revision; 2004 April ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-450 Approximately 0V 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0268E Revision; 2004 April EC-451 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 R/Y ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V ABS003HD 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-452 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-266 . No >> GO TO 3. F G H I PBIB1077E J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-453 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. PBIB1284E 4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between HO2S2 and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-454 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 5. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1146 74 1 1 P1166 55 1 2 C Continuity should exist. 2. D Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1146 74 1 1 P1166 55 1 2 F Continuity should not exist. G 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 I Refer to EC-455, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. J 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003HE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. SEF174Y Revision; 2004 April EC-455 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. SEF662Y 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB0796E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Revision; 2004 April EC-456 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 Removal and Installation ABS003HF A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-457 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 ABS003HG The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003HH Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003HI The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB0820E DTC No. P1147 1147 (Bank 1) P1167 1167 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 maximum voltage monitoring Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition The maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-458 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003HJ NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). SEF174Y If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F G H I J K PBIB0819E 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-464, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M ABS003HK Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground. Revision; 2004 April EC-459 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-464, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision; 2004 April EC-460 PBIB1607E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 Wiring Diagram ABS003HL A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0267E Revision; 2004 April EC-461 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 L/B ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) Revision; 2004 April ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-462 Approximately 0V 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0268E Revision; 2004 April EC-463 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 R/Y ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B/Y Sensors' ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V ABS003HM 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-464 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-257 . No >> GO TO 3. F G H I PBIB1077E J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-465 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. PBIB1284E 4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between HO2S2 and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-466 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 5. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1147 74 1 1 P1167 55 1 2 C Continuity should exist. 2. D Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1147 74 1 1 P1167 55 1 2 F Continuity should not exist. G 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 I Refer to EC-467, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. J 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003HN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. SEF174Y Revision; 2004 April EC-467 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. SEF662Y 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB0796E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minutes. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Revision; 2004 April EC-468 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 Removal and Installation ABS003HO A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-469 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:22690 ABS003HP These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1148 1148 (Bank 1) P1168 1168 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Closed loop control function DTC detecting condition The closed loop control function for bank 1 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. The closed loop control function for bank 2 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. Possible cause ● The heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Heated oxygen sensor heater DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003HQ CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, retry the procedure from step 2. ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. – – 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm and check one of the following. “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage should go above 0.70V at least once. “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage should go below 0.21V at least once. If the check result is NG, perform EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, perform the following step. Let engine idle at least 5 minutes. Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive seconds. B/FUEL SCHDL 2.5 msec or more ENG SPEED More than 1,500 rpm SEC011C Selector lever Suitable position VHCL SPEED SE More than 70 km/h (43 MPH) 6. During this test, P0132 and/or P0152 may be displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If DTC is detected, go to EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision; 2004 April EC-470 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL Overall Function Check ABS003HR Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop control. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. – – 4. A EC Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no-load. The voltage should go above 0.70V at least once. The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once. If NG, go to EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E PBIB1107E Diagnostic Procedure ABS003HS F Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0133, P0153. Refer to EC-218, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-471 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT Description PFP:47850 ABS003HT The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from VDC/ TCS/ABS control unit to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for VDC/TCS/ABS control unit but also for ECM after TCS related repair. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003HU Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this selfdiagnosis. DTC No. P1211 1211 Trouble diagnosis name TCS control unit DTC detecting condition ECM receives a malfunction information from VDC/TCS/ABS control unit. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● VDC/TCS/ABS control unit ● TCS related parts ABS003HV TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure ABS003HW Go to BRC-15, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . Revision; 2004 April EC-472 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:47850 A ABS003HX NOTE: If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC U1001. Refer to EC-140, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and VDC/TCS/ABS control unit. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for VDC/TCS/ABS control unit but C also for ECM after TCS related repair. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003HY D Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this selfdiagnosis. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P1212 1212 TCS communication line ECM can not receive the information from VDC/TCS/ABS control unit continuously. E Possible cause Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) ● VDC/TCS/ABS control unit ● Dead (Weak) battery F G DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003HZ TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-473, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K L SEF058Y WITH GST M Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure ABS003I0 1. CHECK VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT FUNCTION Refer to BRC-15, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-473 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Description PFP:00000 ABS003I1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NOTE: If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-140, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Cooling Fan Control Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Battery Battery voltage*1 Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2 Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ECM function Cooling fan control Actuator IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays) *1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line. The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. Cooling Fan Operation PBIB1103E Revision; 2004 April EC-474 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Cooling Fan Relay Operation A The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line. Cooling fan relay Cooling fan speed 1 2 3 Stop OFF OFF OFF Low ON OFF OFF High ON ON ON EC C COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Cooling Fan Motor D The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows. Cooling fan motor terminals Cooling fan speed (+) (−) 1 3 2 4 1 and 2 3 and 4 E Low High F CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003I2 G Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG CONDITION ● ● COOLING FAN ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Air conditioner switch: OFF SPECIFICATION Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.) ON Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is 100°C (212°F) or more HI H I J K On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003I3 If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated. This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1217 1217 Trouble diagnosis name Engine over temperature (Overheat) DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.) ● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). ● Cooling fan ● Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat). ● Radiator hose ● Radiator ● Engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method. ● Radiator cap ● Engine coolant is not within the specified range. ● Water pump ● Thermostat For more information, refer to EC-484, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . Revision; 2004 April EC-475 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-9, "Changing Engine Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" . 1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-10, "Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio" . 2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. Overall Function Check ABS003I4 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-480, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-480, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Turn ignition switch ON. SEF621W 4. 5. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. If the results are NG, go to EC-480, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF646X WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-480, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-480, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Start engine. Be careful not to overheat engine. Turn air conditioner switch ON. Turn blower fan switch ON. Revision; 2004 April EC-476 SEF621W 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE 6. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed. If NG, go to EC-480, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to the following step. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. 8. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. 9. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 10. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. A EC C SEC163BA D 11. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed. Be careful not to overheat engine. 12. If NG, go to EC-480, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E F G MEC475B H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-477 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Wiring Diagram ABS003I5 TBWT0290E Revision; 2004 April EC-478 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0291E Revision; 2004 April EC-479 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Diagnostic Procedure ABS003I6 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 4. 2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT-II screen. 3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC482, "PROCEDURE A" .) SEF784Z 3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Touch “HIGH” on the CONSULT-II screen. 2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC484, "PROCEDURE B" .) SEF785Z 4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Turn air conditioner switch ON. 3. Turn blower fan switch ON. 4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC482, "PROCEDURE A" .) SEC163BA Revision; 2004 April EC-480 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE 5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION A Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. 3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC484, "PROCEDURE B" .) EC C D E F MEC475B 6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK G Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops. H Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. Pressure should not drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-9, "LEAK CHECK" . ● Hose ● Radiator ● Water pump I J SLC754A K L 7. CHECK RADIATOR CAP Apply pressure to cap with a tester. Radiator cap relief pressure: M 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace radiator cap. SLC755A Revision; 2004 April EC-481 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE 8. CHECK THERMOSTAT 1. 2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. It should seat tightly. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. Valve opening temperature: Valve lift: 76.5°C (170°F) [standard] More than 8.6 mm/90°C (0.339 in/194°F) 3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace thermostat SLC343 9. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-186, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 10. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-484, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . >> INSPECTION END PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E5 and E6. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals 9, 16 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0789E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. 40A fusible links ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-482 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE 3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 7, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram. EC C Continuity should exist. 3. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 13, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram. D PBIB1283E E Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors. F G 4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS H Refer to EC-485, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. I 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Perform EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-483 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following; cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 5, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminal 15, IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground, IPDM E/R terminal 45 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. Check harness continuity between the following; cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 10, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminal 12, IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground, IPDM E/R terminal 45 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram. PBIB1283E Continuity should exist. 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 2. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS Refer to EC-485, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness connectors. Main 12 Causes of Overheating Engine Step OFF 1 Inspection item ● Blocked radiator ● Blocked condenser ● Blocked radiator grille ABS003I7 Equipment Standard ● Visual No blocking Reference page — ● Blocked bumper 2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-10 3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck CO-9 4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa CO-14 2 (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) Revision; 2004 April EC-484 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks CO-9 ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and lower radiator hoses Both hoses should be hot CO-24 ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for DTC P1217 (EC-474 ). OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer Negative — ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature gauge ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when driving — ● Coolant overflow to reservoir tank ● Visual No overflow during driving and idling CO-9 A EC C D OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from reservoir tank to radiator ● Visual Should be initial level in reservoir tank CO-9 OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler gauge 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping) EM-83 12 ● Cylinder block and pistons ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder walls or piston EM-98 E F G *1: Turn the ignition switch ON. *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. *3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" . Component Inspection H ABS003I8 COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 1. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation. I J terminals Speed Cooling fan motor Low High (+) (−) 1 3 2 4 1 and 2 3 and 4 L SEF734W Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor. Revision; 2004 April K M EC-485 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1225 TP SENSOR DTC P1225 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 ABS003I9 Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003IA The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1225 1225 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning performance problem Closed throttle position learning value is excessively low. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) ABS003IB NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-487, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-486 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1225 TP SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ABS003IC 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. EC C D E PBIB1015E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F 1. 2. 3. G Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation ABS003ID ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR I Refer to EM-16, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-487 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1226 TP SENSOR DTC P1226 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 ABS003IE Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003IF The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1226 1226 Trouble diagnosis name Closed throttle position learning performance problem DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning is not performed successfully, repeatedly. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) ABS003IG NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-489, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-488 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1226 TP SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ABS003IH 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. EC C D E PBIB1015E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F 1. 2. 3. G Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation ABS003II ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR I Refer to EM-16, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-489 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16119 ABS003IJ This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1229 1229 Trouble diagnosis name Sensor power supply circuit short DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.) (EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit is shorted.) (PSP sensor circuit is shorted.) (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Power steering pressure sensor ● Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM detects a voltage of power source for sensor is excessively low or high. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003IK NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-492, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-490 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY Wiring Diagram ABS003IL A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWB0071E Revision; 2004 April EC-491 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 48 B/Y Sensors' power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 W/L Sensors' power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 68 Y Sensors' power supply (Power steering pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 90 BR/Y Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V Diagnostic Procedure ABS003IM 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-492 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB0996E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0914E H 3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS I Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 90 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-491 48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-354 49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-605 68 PSP sensor terminal 1 EC-397 J K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L 4. CHECK COMPONENTS M Check the following. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-357, "Component Inspection" .) ● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-95, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .) ● Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-400, "Component Inspection" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning component. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-555, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-493 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-494 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description A ABS003IN SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed *1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Heated oxygen sensors 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Vehicle speed signal*2 Vehicle speed ECM function EC Actuator C D EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve E F *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. G This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. H I COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. J K L SEF337U M CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003IO Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load PURG VOL C/V Revision; 2004 April SPECIFICATION Idle 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-495 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1444 1444 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ABS003IP DTC detecting condition The canister purge flow is detected during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve is stuck open.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Hoses (Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.) ABS003IQ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. PBIB0839E 6. 7. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 seconds.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC499, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. Select “MODE 7” with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-499, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision; 2004 April EC-496 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram ABS003IR A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0282E Revision; 2004 April EC-497 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● 45 L/Y Idle speed SEC990C EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine). SEC991C [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 P L Power supply for ECM A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision; 2004 April EC-498 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ABS003IS 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A CUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D E PBIB1001E 4. F Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. H PBIB0148E I 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E12, F3 ● Joint connector-3 ● Joint connector-4 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E8 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April K L M >> Repair harness or connectors. 1. 2. 3. J EC-499 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-357, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 3. Start engine. 4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB0147E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-501, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. Revision; 2004 April EC-500 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. EC 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 11. C No >> GO TO 13. 1. D PBIB1031E E 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.2 kg (4.9 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12. F G H 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection I J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003IT EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II M Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No PBIB0149E Revision; 2004 April EC-501 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No PBIB0150E Removal and Installation ABS003IU EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-16, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . Revision; 2004 April EC-502 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 A ABS003IV The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System” diagnosis. EC C D PBIB1263E E F G H PBIB1086E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003IW I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON J OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003IX K DTC No. P1446 1446 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve close Revision; 2004 April DTC detecting condition EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed under specified driving conditions. EC-503 Possible cause ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister is saturated with water 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003IY NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. 6. 7. a. b. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute. Repeat next procedures 3 times. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. Never exceed 3 minutes. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-506, "Diagnostic Procedure" SEF058Y . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step. Repeat next procedure 20 times. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. PBIB0972E 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-506, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-504 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Wiring Diagram ABS003IZ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0283E Revision; 2004 April EC-505 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 117 GY/L EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 P L Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure ABS003J0 1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1086E 3. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower. 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-508, "EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. Revision; 2004 April EC-506 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 3. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. EC 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. C No >> GO TO 6. 1. D PBIB1031E E 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.2 kg (4.9 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. F G H 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection I J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. K Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. L Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. M 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-357, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-507 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Inspection ABS003J1 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. 4. PBIB1033E 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. 7. 8. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 6 again. PBIB0151E Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. PBIB1033E 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Revision; 2004 April EC-508 PBIB1034E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 5. Perform step 3 again. A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-509 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description PFP:25551 ABS003J2 ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to EC-644, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. PBIB1006E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003J3 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION MAIN SW ● CANCEL SW ● RESUME/ACC SW ● SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed ON ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON COAST/SET switch: Released OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003J4 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-401. DTC No. P1564 1564 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD steering switch Revision; 2004 April DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause ● An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. ● ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steering switch is out of the specified range. Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● ASCD steering switch ● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck ON. ● ECM EC-510 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003J5 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. Press “CRUISE” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press “ACCEL/RES” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press “COAST/SET” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press “CANCEL” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-514, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-511 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Wiring Diagram ABS003J6 TBWT0293E Revision; 2004 April EC-512 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 67 EC WIRE COLOR B/W ITEM Sensors' ground (Mass air flow sensor / IAT sensor / Power steering pressure sensor / EVAP control system pressure sensor / ASCD steering switch) CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● ASCD steering switch is released. [Ignition switch: ON] ● G/Y ASCD steering switch DATA (DC Voltage) C [Ignition switch: ON] 99 A CRUISE switch is pressed. [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch is pressed. [Ignition switch: ON] ● COAST/SET switch is pressed. [Ignition switch: ON] ● ACCEL/RESUME switch is pressed. Approximately 0V D Approximately 4V Approximately 0V E F Approximately 1V G Approximately 2V Approximately 3V H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-513 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure ABS003J7 1. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check each item indication under the following conditions. Switch CRUISE Monitor item MAIN SW COAST/SET SET SW ACCEL/RES RESUME/ACC SW Condition Indication Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF SEC006D CANCEL CANCEL SW Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button. Switch CRUISE SW COAST/SET SW ACCEL/RES SW CANCEL SW Condition Voltage [V] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 2 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 3 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 1 Released Approx. 4 PBIB0311E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M203. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1006E Revision; 2004 April EC-514 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Joint connector-3 ● Combination switch (spiral cable) ● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14. Refer to Wiring Diagram. D E Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. F G 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Combination switch (spiral cable) ● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch I >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J 6. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to EC-516, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace steering wheel. K L 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-515 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Inspection ABS003J8 ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable). Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch. Switch CRUISE SW COAST/SET SW ACCEL/RES SW CANCEL SW Revision; 2004 April Condition Resistance [Ω] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 660 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 1,480 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 250 Released Approx. 4,000 EC-516 PBIB0967E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 A ABS003J9 When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-644, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. EC C D PBIB1282E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003JA Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW 1 (ASCD brake switch) BRAKE SW 2 (stop lamp switch) CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON ● Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Fully released ● Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF ● Brake pedal fully released OFF ● Brake pedal depressed ON Ignition switch: ON F SPECIFICATION ON G On Board Diagnosis Logic H ABS003JB This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: ● If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-401 ● This self-diagnosis has one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed. 1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch is turned OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition ● A) P1572 1572 When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent to ECM at the same time. ASCD brake switch ● B) Revision; 2004 April ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving EC-517 I J K L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (M/T models) (The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.) ● Stop lamp switch ● ASCD brake switch ● ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation (M/T models) ● ECM 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH DTC confirmation Procedure ABS003JC CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be detected. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF). Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Press CRUISE switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights up. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-521, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step. 5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Depress the brake pedal for more than five seconds so as not to come off from the above-mentioned vehicle speed. 6. PBIB2386E If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-521, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-518 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Wiring Diagram ABS003JD A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0294E Revision; 2004 April EC-519 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 P/L Stop lamp switch Brake pedal is fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is depressed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 108 SB ASCD brake switch Revision; 2004 April ● Brake pedal is depressed (A/T models) ● Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed (M/T models) Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is fully released (A/T models) ● Brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released (M/T models) EC-520 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure ABS003JE A A/T MODELS 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I EC With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. CONDITION C INDICATION When brake pedal is depressed OFF When brake pedal is fully released ON D E F SEC011D Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is fully released G H VOLTAGE Approximately 0V I Battery voltage J MBIB0061E K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. L M Revision; 2004 April EC-521 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal is released OFF When brake pedal is depressed ON SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage MBIB0060E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 8. Revision; 2004 April EC-522 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB1005E E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. G H PBIB0857E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Joint connector-2 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-523 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-531, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. 8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. PBIB1005E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. PBIB1184E 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-524 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. C D 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors E108, M15 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Joint connector-1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH H Refer to EC-531, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. I 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision; 2004 April EC-525 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH M/T MODELS 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed OFF When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released ON SEC011D Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION VOLTAGE When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed Approximately 0V When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released Battery voltage MBIB0061E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-526 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II A With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION EC INDICATION When brake pedal is released OFF When brake pedal is depressed ON C D SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed E F VOLTAGE G Approximately 0V Battery voltage H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 11. MBIB0060E I 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. K L M PBIB1282E 4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0799E Revision; 2004 April EC-527 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1282E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB0857E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-2 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-531, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. Revision; 2004 April EC-528 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 8. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 108. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. D 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 10. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH H Refer to EC-531, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. I 11. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. K L M PBIB1282E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12. PBIB0117E Revision; 2004 April EC-529 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E108, M15 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Joint connector-1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-531, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-530 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Inspection ABS003JF A ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. EC Continuity C Should exist. Should not exist. D If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. E SEC023D ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When clutch pedal is fully released. When clutch pedal is depressed. F G Continuity Should exist. H Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5, "CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. I SEC024D J STOP LAMP SWITCH (FOR A/T MODELS) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. K L Continuity Should not exist. Should exist. M If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. PBIB1185E STOP LAMP SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Revision; 2004 April EC-531 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. Continuity Should not exist. Should exist. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. PBIB0118E Revision; 2004 April EC-532 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description PFP:31036 A ABS003JG The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD EC control. Refer to EC-644, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003JH This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-140, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer to EC-390, "DTC P0500 VSS" ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-401, "DTC P0605 ECM" DTC No. P1574 1574 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD vehicle speed sensor C D E F DTC Detecting Condition ECM detects a difference between two vehicle speed signals is out of the specified range. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) ● Combination meter ● VDC/TCS/ABS control unit ● Wheel sensor ● TCM ● ECM G H I ABS003JI CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. J K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. M Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF). Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH). If DTC is detected, go to EC-534, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-533 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ABS003JJ 1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-37 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated. 2. CHECK DTC WITH VDC/TCS ABS CONTROL UNIT Refer to AT-41, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER Check combination meter function. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-534 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Component Description PFP:32006 A ABS003JK When the gear position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. EC CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003JL Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM P/N POSI SW C CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON Shift lever: Except above OFF D On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name ABS003JM DTC detecting condition ● P1706 1706 Park/neutral position switch The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and driving. DTC Confirmation Procedure E Possible cause Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.] ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch ● Combination meter (A/T models) F G ABS003JN CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H I WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions. Position (Selector lever) ON Except the above position OFF If NG, go to EC-540, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,400 - 6375 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.0 - 31.8 msec VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-540, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision; 2004 April K Known-good signal N and P position (A/T) Neutral position (M/T) 3. 4. 5. J EC-535 L M SEF212Y SEF213Y 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Overall Function Check ABS003JO Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal) and ground under the following conditions. Condition (Gear position) P and N position (A/T) Neutral position (M/T) Except the above position 3. Voltage V (Known good data) Approx. 0 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) If NG, go to EC-540, "Diagnostic Procedure" . MBIB0043E Revision; 2004 April EC-536 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Wiring Diagram ABS003JP A A/T MODELS EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0295E Revision; 2004 April EC-537 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 G/OR PNP switch [Ignition switch: ON] ● Revision; 2004 April Shift lever: P or N Except the above gear position EC-538 DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH M/T MODELS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0296E Revision; 2004 April EC-539 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 G/OR PNP switch Shift lever: Neutral [Ignition switch: ON] ● Except the above gear position Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ABS003JQ A/T MODELS 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “A/T”, then “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Select “P/N POSI SW” signal and check its indication under the following conditions. Condition (Gear position) P/N POSI SW P or N position ON Other position OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0102E 3. CHECK PNP SWITCH Without CONSULT-II Confirm that the PNP switch signal is sent to TCM correctly. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Check the PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-540 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH 5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. Check harness continuity between TCM terminal 48 and combination meter terminal 15. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC C Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7 NG >> GO TO 6. D E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F102, M72 ● Harness for open or short between TCM and combination meter F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. H Check harness continuity between combination meter terminal 45 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. J K 8. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 12. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. M 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F102, M72 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April L EC-541 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH 10. CHECK COMBINATION METER Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace combination meter 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END M/T MODELS 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3 NG >> GO TO 2. 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F102, M72 ● Joint connector-4 ● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground ● >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK PNP SWITCH Refer to MT-12, "NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace PNP switch. Revision; 2004 April EC-542 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END C D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-543 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Description PFP:25320 ABS003JR Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003JS Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003JT The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1805 1805 Trouble diagnosis name Brake switch DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Stop lamp switch A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an extremely long time while the vehicle is driving. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. Therefore, acceleration will be poor. Driving condition When engine is idling Normal When accelerating Poor acceleration DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003JU WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-546, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-544 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Wiring Diagram ABS003JV A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0297E Revision; 2004 April EC-545 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 P/L Stop lamp switch Brake pedal is fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is depressed Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ABS003JW 1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Brake pedal Stop lamp Fully released Not illuminated Depressed Illuminated OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision; 2004 April EC-546 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC C D PBIB1282E 2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F G PBIB1184E H I J K PBIB0117E L Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. M 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● 10A fuse ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 ● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-547 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH 4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1282E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E108, M15 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Joint connector-1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-549, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-548 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Component Inspection ABS003JX A STOP LAMP SWITCH (FOR A/T MODELS) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. EC Continuity C Should not exist. Should exist. D If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. E PBIB1185E STOP LAMP SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. F G Continuity Should not exist. H Should exist. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. I PBIB0118E J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-549 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 ABS003JY The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003JZ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.7V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.3 - 1.2V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003K0 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. NOTE: If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-490 . DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause P2122 2122 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) P2123 2123 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision; 2004 April EC-550 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003K1 A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-553, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-551 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003K2 TBWT0276E Revision; 2004 April EC-552 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 82 GY/L Sensors' ground (APP sensor 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 0V D [Engine is running] 83 B/R A Sensors' ground (APP sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E 90 BR/Y Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 G Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F [Ignition switch: ON] 98 LG/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.15 - 0.60V G [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V H [Ignition switch: ON] 106 BR Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.5 - 1.0V I 3.9 - 4.7V J [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure ABS003K3 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. L >> GO TO 2. M PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April K EC-553 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB0996E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0914E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 82. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-554 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR 6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. C 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor E F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK APP SENSOR G Refer to EC-579, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. H 9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. I Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J K >> INSPECTION END 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003K4 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V Fully released 0.15 - 0.60V Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) Revision; 2004 April MBIB0023E EC-555 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR 4. 5. 6. 7. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation ABS003K5 ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision; 2004 April EC-556 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 A ABS003K6 The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the acceleraEC tor position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM E receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003K7 F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.7V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.3 - 1.2V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF G H I *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003K8 J These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2127 2127 P2128 2128 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision; 2004 April EC-557 2003 G35 Coupe K L M DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003K9 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-560, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-558 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003KA A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWB0070E Revision; 2004 April EC-559 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 47 B Sensors' power supply (Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] 82 GY/L Sensors' ground (APP sensor 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 83 B/R Sensors' ground (APP sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V 90 BR/Y Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 G Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 98 LG/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.15 - 0.60V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V [Ignition switch: ON] 106 BR Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.5 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure 3.9 - 4.7V ABS003KB 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-560 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB0996E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0915E H 3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 91. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. L 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor M >> Repair or replace open circuit. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-559 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-566 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-561 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR 6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-570, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 83. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-562 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR 12. CHECK APP SENSOR A Refer to EC-579, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. EC 13. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY C 1. 2. 3. 4. D Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . E >> INSPECTION END 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . G >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection ABS003KC ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR H 1. 2. 3. I Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V Fully released 0.15 - 0.60V Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. J K MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation M ABS003KD ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision; 2004 April EC-563 L 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2135 TP SENSOR DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 ABS003KE Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003KF Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* SPECIFICATION Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003KG This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2135 2135 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle position sensor circuit range/performance problem DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and TP sensor 2. Possible cause ● Harness or connector (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision; 2004 April EC-564 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2135 TP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003KH A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-567, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-565 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003KI TBWB0066E Revision; 2004 April EC-566 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 EC WIRE COLOR B A ITEM Sensors' power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 1 D More than 0.36V E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Less than 4.75V F [Engine is running] 66 W/R Sensors' ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V G [Ignition switch: ON] 69 91 R/L G Throttle position sensor 2 Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 2) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released H Less than 4.75V I [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] More than 0.36V J Approximately 5V K Diagnostic Procedure ABS003KJ 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. M >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-567 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2135 TP SENSOR 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB0995E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0082E 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-566 91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-559 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-563, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-568 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2135 TP SENSOR 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. A Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC C >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. E F 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. D Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G H I Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J K 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR L Refer to EC-193, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. M 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-569 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Component Inspection ABS003KK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1signal), 69 (TP sensor 2signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation PBIB1170E ABS003KL ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-16, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . Revision; 2004 April EC-570 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2138 APP SENSOR DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 A ABS003KM The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the acceleraEC tor position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM E receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003KN F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.7V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.3 - 1.2V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF G H I *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS003KO This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. NOTE: If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-490 . DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● P2138 2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit range/performance problem Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2. Harness or connector (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1 and 2) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision; 2004 April EC-571 2003 G35 Coupe J K L M DTC P2138 APP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS003KP NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-574, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision; 2004 April EC-572 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003KQ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWB0069E Revision; 2004 April EC-573 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 47 B Sensors' power supply (Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] 82 GY/L Sensors' ground (APP sensor 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 83 B/R Sensors' ground (APP sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V 90 BR/Y Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 G Sensors' power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 98 LG/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.15 - 0.60V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V [Ignition switch: ON] 106 BR Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.5 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure 3.9 - 4.7V ABS003KR 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. PBIB0986E Revision; 2004 April EC-574 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2138 APP SENSOR 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB0996E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0914E H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I K Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 5. M PBIB0915E Revision; 2004 April EC-575 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2138 APP SENSOR 5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 91. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair or replace open circuit. 7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-573 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-566 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-570, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 9. 9. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-576 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2138 APP SENSOR 10. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 83, APP sensor terminal 3 EC and ECM terminal 82. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. D E 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. G H Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5, ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. J K 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor L ● M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-579, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. Revision; 2004 April EC-577 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2138 APP SENSOR 15. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-578 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Component Inspection ABS003KS A ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V Fully released 0.15 - 0.60V Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. EC C D E MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-46, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-46, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation F ABS003KT G ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-579 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description PFP:22448 ABS003KU IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. PBIB1007E Revision; 2004 April EC-580 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL Wiring Diagram ABS003KV A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0298E Revision; 2004 April EC-581 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W ECM relay (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 P L Power supply for ECM Revision; 2004 April For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] EC-582 DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0299E Revision; 2004 April EC-583 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.2V [Engine is running] 60 61 62 PU/W L/R Y/R ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 SEC986C 0.1 - 0.4V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. SEC987C : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision; 2004 April EC-584 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0300E Revision; 2004 April EC-585 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.2V [Engine is running] 79 80 81 GY/R GY G/R ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 SEC986C 0.1 - 0.4V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. SEC987C : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure ABS003KW 1. CHECK ENGINE START Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 4. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. 1. PBIB0133E Revision; 2004 April EC-586 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL 3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A Without CONSULT-II Let engine idle. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope. 3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below. 1. 2. EC C D E SEC986C PBIB1186E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. F 4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Go to EC-133, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" . I J MBIB0034E K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-587 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL 5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. PBIB1286E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB0624E 6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 35 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E12, F3 ● Joint connector-2 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-588 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL 8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 9. CHECK CONDENSER E Refer to EC-591, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace condenser. F 10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. H I J K PBIB1007E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L Voltage: Battery voltage M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. PBIB0138E 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F18, F201 ● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F3 >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-589 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL 12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F18, F201 ● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and engine ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. 15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F18, F201 ● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 16. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EC-591, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor. 17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. refer to PG-17 . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-590 2003 G35 Coupe IGNITION SIGNAL Component Inspection ABS003KX A IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞ EC C 1 and 3 Except 0 2 and 3 D E PBIB0847E CONDENSER 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance F G Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F) H I PBIB0794E Removal and Installation ABS003KY J IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EM-31, "IGNITION COIL" . K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-591 2003 G35 Coupe INJECTOR CIRCUIT INJECTOR CIRCUIT Component Description PFP:16600 ABS003KZ The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. SEF375Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003L0 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load B/FUEL SCHDL INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2 Revision; 2004 April SPECIFICATION Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec 2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec EC-592 2003 G35 Coupe INJECTOR CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram ABS003L1 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0301E Revision; 2004 April EC-593 2003 G35 Coupe INJECTOR CIRCUIT Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 21 22 23 G R/Y R/B ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Injector No. 5 Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEC985C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 40 41 42 P R/L R/W ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Injector No. 6 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEC985C : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision; 2004 April EC-594 2003 G35 Coupe INJECTOR CIRCUIT Diagnostic Procedure ABS003L2 1. INSPECTION START A Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. EC C 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION D With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. E F G PBIB0133E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. H I J K L PBIB1725E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April M EC-595 2003 G35 Coupe INJECTOR CIRCUIT 3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect injector harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB0997E 4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0582E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Harness connectors F33, F221 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-596 2003 G35 Coupe INJECTOR CIRCUIT 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors F33, F221 ● Harness for open or short between injector and ECM EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 7. CHECK INJECTOR Refer to EC-597, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace injector. D E 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END G Component Inspection ABS003L3 INJECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect injector harness connector. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. H Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] I J K PBIB1727E Removal and Installation ABS003L4 INJECTOR L Refer to EM-34, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . M Revision; 2004 April EC-597 2003 G35 Coupe FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT Description PFP:17042 ABS003L5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Battery Battery voltage* ECM Function Actuator Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump. Condition Fuel pump operation Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. Engine running and cranking Operates. When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds. Except as shown above Stops. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the furl tank. PBIB1100E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003L6 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM FUEL PUMP RLY Revision; 2004 April CONDITION ● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON ● Engine running or cranking ● Except above conditions SPECIFICATION ON OFF EC-598 2003 G35 Coupe FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram ABS003L7 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0302E Revision; 2004 April EC-599 2003 G35 Coupe FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] ● 113 B/OR Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON. Diagnostic Procedure BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ABS003L8 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers. Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB1020E 2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 113 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1187E Revision; 2004 April EC-600 2003 G35 Coupe FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT 3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 20 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 12. C D PBIB1397E E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E11, F2 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM F G >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: I J Battery voltage should exist for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. K 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6. L PBIB0624E 6. CHECK 15A FUSE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect 15A fuse. 3. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace fuse. Revision; 2004 April EC-601 2003 G35 Coupe M FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT 7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E7. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 23 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E123, B41 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser >> Repair harness or connectors. 9. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK CONDENSER Refer to EC-603, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace condenser. 11. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLU AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and harness connector B41 terminal 3, “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-602 PBIB1280E 2003 G35 Coupe FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. EC Component Inspection ABS003L9 FUEL PUMP 1. 2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 1 and 3. C D Resistance: Approximately 1.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] E F SEC918C G CONDENSER 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Check resistance between condenser terminals as 1 and 2. Resistance H Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F) I J K PBIB0794E Removal and Installation ABS003LA FUEL PUMP L Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . M Revision; 2004 April EC-603 2003 G35 Coupe REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:92136 ABS003LB The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. PBIB1009E SEF099XA Revision; 2004 April EC-604 2003 G35 Coupe REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram ABS003LC A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0303E Revision; 2004 April EC-605 2003 G35 Coupe REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 49 67 WIRE COLOR ITEM W/L Sensors' power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) B/W Sensors' ground (Mass air flow sensor / IAT sensor / Power steering pressure sensor / EVAP control system pressure sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 70 R/B Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON. (Compressor operates.) Diagnostic Procedure 1.0 - 4.0V ABS003LD 1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB1188E Revision; 2004 April EC-606 2003 G35 Coupe REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR 2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF. Stop engine. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB1009E 5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Approximately 5V G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. H PBIB0188E I 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E11, F2 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor J K >> Repair harness or connectors. 4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. Revision; 2004 April EC-607 2003 G35 Coupe REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E11, F2 ● Joint connector-3 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E11, F2 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation ABS003LE REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to ATC-156, "Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" . Revision; 2004 April EC-608 2003 G35 Coupe ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description PFP:25350 A ABS003LF The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. EC CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003LG Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM LOAD SIGNAL C CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF. OFF Diagnostic Procedure D ABS003LH E 1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. 3. F Turn ignition switch ON. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. Select "LOAD SIGNAL" and check indication under the following conditions. Condition Indication Rear window defogger switch ON ON Rear window defogger switch OFF OFF G H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. I PBIB0103E J 2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II Check "LOAD SIGNAL" indication under the following conditions. Condition Indication Lighting switch ON at 2nd position ON Lighting switch OFF OFF K L OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. M PBIB0103E 3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM Refer to GW-62, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" . >> INSPECTION END 4. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM Refer to LT-7, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-32, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-609 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 ABS003LI When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-644, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. PBIB1282E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003LJ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW 1 (ASCD brake switch) BRAKE SW 2 (stop lamp switch) Revision; 2004 April CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION ● Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Fully released ON ● Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF ● Brake pedal fully released OFF ● Brake pedal depressed ON Ignition switch: ON EC-610 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Wiring Diagram ABS003LK A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0304E Revision; 2004 April EC-611 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 P/L Stop lamp switch Brake pedal is fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is depressed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 108 SB ASCD brake switch Revision; 2004 April ● Brake pedal is depressed (A/T models) ● Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed (M/T models) Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is fully released (A/T models) ● Brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released (M/T models) EC-612 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure ABS003LL A A/T MODELS 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I EC With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. CONDITION C INDICATION When brake pedal is depressed OFF When brake pedal is fully released ON D E F SEC011D Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is fully released G H VOLTAGE Approximately 0V I Battery voltage J MBIB0061E K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. L M Revision; 2004 April EC-613 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal is released OFF When brake pedal is depressed ON SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage MBIB0060E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision; 2004 April EC-614 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D PBIB1005E E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. G H PBIB0857E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Joint connector-2 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-615 2003 G35 Coupe L M ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-531, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. 8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. PBIB1005E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. PBIB1184E 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April EC-616 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. C D 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors E108, M15 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Joint connector-1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH H Refer to EC-531, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. I 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision; 2004 April EC-617 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH M/T MODELS 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed OFF When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released ON SEC011D Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION VOLTAGE When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed Approximately 0V When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released Battery voltage MBIB0061E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April EC-618 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II A With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION EC INDICATION When brake pedal is released OFF When brake pedal is depressed ON C D SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed E F VOLTAGE G Approximately 0V Battery voltage H OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. MBIB0060E I 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. K L M PBIB1282E 4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0799E Revision; 2004 April EC-619 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1282E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB0857E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-2 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-531, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. Revision; 2004 April EC-620 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 8. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 108. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. D 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 10. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH H Refer to EC-531, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. I 11. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. K L M PBIB1282E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12. PBIB0117E Revision; 2004 April EC-621 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E108, M15 ● Harness connectors M72, F102 ● Joint connector-1 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-531, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April EC-622 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Inspection ABS003LM A ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. EC Continuity C Should exist. Should not exist. D If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. E SEC023D ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When clutch pedal is fully released. When clutch pedal is depressed. F G Continuity Should exist. H Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5, "CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. I SEC024D J STOP LAMP SWITCH (FOR A/T MODELS) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. K L Continuity Should not exist. Should exist. M If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. PBIB1185E STOP LAMP SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Revision; 2004 April EC-623 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. Continuity Should not exist. Should exist. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. PBIB0118E Revision; 2004 April EC-624 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD INDICATOR ASCD INDICATOR Component Description PFP:24814 A ABS003LN ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. EC CRUISE indicator illuminates when CRUISE switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. C ● CRUISE indicator is illuminated. ● SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. D SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to EC-644, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS003LO E Specification data are reference value. MONITOR ITEM CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION ● CRUISE switch pressed ON ● CRUISE switch released OFF Ignition switch: ON ● CRUISE switch: ON ● COAST/SET switch pressed ON ● When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ● COAST/SET switch released OFF F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-625 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD INDICATOR Wiring Diagram ABS003LP TBWT0305E Revision; 2004 April EC-626 2003 G35 Coupe ASCD INDICATOR Diagnostic Procedure ABS003LQ 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. ASCD INDICATOR CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION ● CRUISE switch pressed ON ● CRUISE switch released OFF Ignition switch: ON ● CRUISE switch: ON ● COAST/SET switch pressed ON ● When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ● COAST/SET switch released OFF OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. EC C D E 2. CHECK DTC F Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-140, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . G H 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION Does combination meter operate normally? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . I J 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-132, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision; 2004 April EC-627 2003 G35 Coupe MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR Wiring Diagram PFP:24814 ABS003LR TBWT0306E Revision; 2004 April EC-628 2003 G35 Coupe MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TBWT0307E Revision; 2004 April EC-629 2003 G35 Coupe EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Description PFP:14950 ABS003LS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PBIB1631E The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling. Revision; 2004 April EC-630 2003 G35 Coupe EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1022E Revision; 2004 April EC-631 2003 G35 Coupe EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PBIB1066E Revision; 2004 April EC-632 2003 G35 Coupe EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Component Inspection ABS003LT A EVAP CANISTER Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Block port B . 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C . 3. Release blocked port B . 4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C . 5. Block port A and B . 6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage. EC C D PBIB1044E FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP) 1. E Wipe clean valve housing. F G H SEF445Y 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. I Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm , 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.48 psi) 2 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. J K SEF943S L EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-340 . M FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-282 . EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-347 . EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-357 . Revision; 2004 April EC-633 2003 G35 Coupe EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM EVAP SERVICE PORT Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak. SEF462UA Removal and Installation ABS003LU EVAP CANISTER Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. PBIB1029E EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. PBIB1030E How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ABS003LV CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. NOTE: ● Do not start engine. ● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak. ● Revision; 2004 April EC-634 2003 G35 Coupe EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter. Turn ignition switch ON. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen. EC C D E PEF838U 6. 7. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. F G H PEF917U 8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . I J K L SEF200U M WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. 2. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP service port adapter. SEF462UA Revision; 2004 April EC-635 2003 G35 Coupe EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM 3. Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system. 4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi). Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-631, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . PBIB1086E 5. 6. Revision; 2004 April EC-636 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) System Description PFP:00032 A ABS003LW EC C D E F PBIB1068E From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged during driving. WARNING: When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: ● Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop. ● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area. ● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. CAUTION: ● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: – Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely. – Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-48, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . – Disconnect battery ground cable. ● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed. ● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. ● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. ● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection. ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Revision; 2004 April EC-637 2003 G35 Coupe G H I J K L M ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) Diagnostic Procedure ABS003LX SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.2 kg (4.9 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. PBIB1031E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-640, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. Revision; 2004 April EC-638 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING. A 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. C The weight should be less than 2.2 kg (4.9 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. D NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. F G H PBIB1031E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I Replace EVAP canister with a new one. J >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. L >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace filler neck tube. Revision; 2004 April EC-639 2003 G35 Coupe M ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) 7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-640, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace fuel filler tube. 9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. 10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II 1. 2. 3. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. SEF665U Component Inspection ABS003LY REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. a. b. c. 3. 4. a. b. c. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-11, "FUEL TANK" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Revision; 2004 April EC-640 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. A EC C D E F PBIB1035E G Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. a. b. c. d. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-11, "FUEL TANK" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel gauge retainer. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. H I J K L M PBIB1035E Revision; 2004 April EC-641 2003 G35 Coupe POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description PFP:11810 ABS003LZ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SEC921C This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions. PBIB1588E Component Inspection ABS003M0 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. PBIB1589E Revision; 2004 April EC-642 2003 G35 Coupe POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. 2. A Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. EC C S-ET277 D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-643 2003 G35 Coupe AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) System Description PFP:18930 ABS003M1 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input signal to ECM ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation ASCD clutch switch Clutch pedal operation ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Combination meter* Vehicle speed TCM* Powertrain revolution ECM function ASCD vehicle speed control Actuator Electric throttle control actuator *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. BASIC ASCD SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/ h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control. NOTE: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. SET OPERATION Press ASCD CRUISE switch (Main switch). (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.) When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH), press SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.) ACCEL OPERATION If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. CANCEL OPERATION When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled. ● CANCEL switch is pressed ● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared) ● Brake pedal is depressed ● Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models) ● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T models) ● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed ● VDC/TCS system is operated When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform the driver by blinking indicator lamp. ● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may blink slowly. When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET switch or RESUME switch. ● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly. If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle speed memory will be erased. Revision; 2004 April EC-644 2003 G35 Coupe AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) COAST OPERATION When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. RESUME OPERATION When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions. ● Brake pedal is released ● Clutch pedal is released (M/T models) ● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models) ● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) Component Description A EC C D ABS003M2 ASCD STEERING SWITCH E Refer to EC-510 . ASCD BRAKE SWITCH F Refer to EC-517 , and EC-610 . ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH G Refer to EC-517 . STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-517 , EC-544 and EC-610 . H ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EC-415 , EC-417 , EC-423 and EC-428 . I ASCD INDICATOR Refer to EC-625 . J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-645 2003 G35 Coupe SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) PFP:00030 ABS003M3 Approximately 350 (3.57, 51) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Target idle speed Air conditioner: ON Ignition timing ABS003M4 A/T No-load* (in P or N position) M/T No-load* (in Neutral position) A/T In P or N position M/T In Neutral position A/T In P or N position M/T In Neutral position 650±50 rpm 775 rpm or more 15° ± 5° BTDC *: Under the following conditions: ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) ● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position Calculated Load Value ABS003M5 Conditions Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST) At idle 5 - 35 At 2,500 rpm 5 - 35 Mass Air Flow Sensor ABS003M6 Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V) Output voltage at idle 0.9 - 1.2*V 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle* 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm* Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Intake Air Temperature Sensor ABS003M7 Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06 80 (176) 0.295 - 0.349 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ABS003M8 Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ABS003M9 Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.0Ω Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater ABS003MA Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 5.0 - 7.0Ω Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ABS003MB Refer to EC-306, "Component Inspection" . Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ABS003MC Refer to EC-314, "Component Inspection" . Revision; 2004 April EC-646 2003 G35 Coupe SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Throttle Control Motor ABS003MD A Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω Injector ABS003ME EC Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 13.5 - 17.5Ω Fuel Pump ABS003MF C Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1.0Ω D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April EC-647 2003 G35 Coupe SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision; 2004 April EC-648 2003 G35 Coupe
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : Yes Create Date : 2004:04:13 14:50:03 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows Title : EC.fm Creator : FrameMaker+SGML 5.5.6p145J Modify Date : 2004:06:03 17:25:56-07:00 Page Count : 648 Page Mode : UseOutlinesEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools